Manual Premier Linea 6

Job No.
162265 OWNERS MANUAL INDEX
Line No. System-Item Part No. & S-No. Description Quantity
100 01-001 5314-58 PROBE BOX,AL SGL POS 4"MAX 4

200 01-001 5314-57 PROBE,HORIZ AL 4"OD 4
300 01-001 5121-7 GATE,SLIDE 12" SQ AL 1
400 01-001 5314-128 SCREEN BOX, 12" SQ. ALUM. 1
550 01-001 2310-358.0004 TUBE,RD AL 4"OD .072WL SHOT P 8
650 01-001 2310-218.0003 EL,AL 4"OD 90 48"CLR 14 GA. SP 10
700 01-001 2311-16 CPLG,COMP 4"OD 3-BOLT 30
800 01-002 5193-23 RCVR,S4-2424 4"PERF SSCSSL 4
900 01-002 4127-206 MTG RNG, 2424 PELLET SS 4
1000 01-002 2310-491 HOSE CLEAR 4"ID W/GRND WIRE 48
1100 01-002 2450-3 CLP,HOSE SS 4-1/8"TO 5"ID 16
1200 01-003 2310-358 TUBE,RD AL 4"OD X 20FT .072WL 5
1300 01-003 2310-487 EL,AL 4"OD 14GA 12"CLR 90DEG 6
1400 01-003 5302-125 TEE,ALUMINUM 4"OD 4
1500 01-004 2311-16 CPLG,COMP 4"OD 3-BOLT 30
1600 01-004 F15215-41 4"OD INLINE FLTR GRP PU CLN CE
1600 01-004 2310-491 HOSE CLEAR 4"ID W/GRND WIRE 20
1600 01-004 2401-9 SCREW,MA GR2 HHD 5/16-18X1-1/4 4
1600 01-004 2416-14 NUT,HEX PLTD 5/16"-18NC 4
1600 01-004 2423-20 WASHER,LOCK PLTD 5/16" MED 4
1600 01-004 2450-3 CLP,HOSE SS 4-1/8"TO 5"ID 8
1600 01-004 5215-41 FIL,INLINE 4" PUCLN 24 VDC CS 1
1600 01-004 5316-62 STAND,SUP 2400 INLINE FIL-ALL 1
1600 01-004 5507-95 KIT,CONVERSION FINES COLLECT 1
1700 01-005 5158-47AM BLWR,VAC-PAC 25HP 6ML 596 CFM 1
1800 01-005 5309-125 SIL,VERT DISCHARGE 5" 1
1900 01-006 5713-12 MOTOR STARTER 32-43 AMP24VDC 1
2000 01-006 5741-99 SERIES 4 2400 CONT MPC ATEX 1
2100 01-006 2109-74 CABLE,DEVICENET X 100 FT 1
Phone: 785-825-1611 Premier Pneumatics, Inc.

1 606 N. Front St. / P.O. Box
Information subject to change
without notice. 17
Salina, KS 67402-0017
OPERATIONAL SEQUENCE FOR SERIES 4
GENERAL OPERATION
The receivers are serviced, one at a time, in the order in which they call for material. The overall operation of the
system is controlled by a SERIES 4 MPC CONTROLLER. It manages up to 24 receivers, with a single vacuum
blower and one back-up blower, or the system can be controlled by a SERIES 4 PLC CONTROLLER. It manages
up to 24 receivers and can run one or two vacuum blowers operating independently along with one back-up
blower.
RECEIVERS FOR “KEEP FULL” OPERATION

“Keep Full” receivers are designed to keep the hopper below each receiver full. This type of receiver is equipped
with a gravity discharge gate. When the service cycle ends, the weight of the material inside the receiver causes
the discharge gate to open. The receivers are either equipped with a level switch as integral to the gravity
discharge gate assembly or a secondary level switch that is mounted in the hopper below the receiver. When the
receiver’s gravity discharge gate is in the almost closed position or a signal from the secondary level switch is
detected, a call for material is established.
RECEIVERS FOR “FEEDER REFILL” OPERATION

“Feeder Refill” receivers are designed to either immediately dispense the receiver’s contents or hold material in
the vessel until a signal is received to discharge. This type of receiver is equipped with a powered discharge gate.
When material has dropped below the level switch in the receiver, the receiver establishes a call for material.
Upon receiving a signal from the Feeder or Equipment below the receiver, the discharge gate will open for a set
time duration as long as the “refill” signal is constantly present. The discharge time is adjustable. When the
discharge time has elapsed or the “refill” signal is removed, the discharge gate will close. Upon receiving the
closed signal (proofing is optional) from the discharge gate, the receiver will resume the call signal. The receivers
are serviced, one at a time, in the order in which they called for material.
GENERAL PROGRAMMING FEATURES

…Any receiver can have a fill cycle based on time.
…Any receiver can have a fill cycle based on a level switch. (This applies to receivers with high level switches in
the receiver body).
…If the fill cycle based on time is selected, then a level switch (if included) in the receiver can serve as a back-up
and initiate an overfill alarm.
…If the fill cycle based on a level switch is selected, the fill time expiring can initiate a fill “time-out” alarm.
When a receiver’s turn for service arrives, the following Material Call sequence is initiated:
1. The vacuum sequencing valve on the calling receiver energizes.
2. The feeding device starts.
3. Material is conveyed for the programmed fill time, or until material reaches the receiver level switch.
4. The feeding device stops.
5. After the material draw cycle, the purge valve opens for the programmed time duration (if applicable).
6. The vacuum sequencing valve de-energizes, ending the receiver’s service cycle.
Any vacuum sequencing powder receivers with reverse-jet cleaning for its filters, has programmable cleaning
cycles. These cycles include cleaning during fill, after fill, during discharge, or any combination thereof. This
greatly reduces manual filter cleaning and makes the unit ideal for handling a wide variety of materials. All
vacuum sequencing powder receivers with reverse-jet cleaning will incorporate a static in-line filter installed prior
to the vacuum blower.
Any system utilizing vacuum sequencing receivers with perforated metal filters, include a pulse-cleaning in-line
filter installed prior to the vacuum blower. The pulse-cleaning cycle includes a programmable number of pulses
after the blower shuts down. Also, an interval can be programmed to shut down the blower, initiating a cleaning
cycle.
INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
Effective 05-01-10
INSTALLATION GUIDELINES FOR CONVEYING AND AIR ONLY LINES
1. Please note the system profile on the flow performance and may result in a plugged line.
drawing and the operational sequence both Elbows should not be installed back to back.
located in your electronic Owner’s Manual. Line compression couplings need to be in-
The system has been designed based on stalled correctly and tightened securely.
these distances and parameters. Any varia- 3. All air and conveying lines need to be sup-
tion in the air only line, conveying line dis- ported. Do not rely on equipment alone to
tances, amount of hose, or number of elbows support air and conveying lines.
may affect the system’s performance and 4. At a minimum, a 10-foot horizontal accelera-
conveying rate. The operational sequence tion zone is required at the material pick-up or
provides a set of steps on basic operation of entry point before installing a bend (elbow) in
the system. the line. An inadequate acceleration zone will
2. All conveying lines should run straight hori- adversely affect the system’s performance.
zontal or straight vertical. Any lines that an- 5. Please contact Premier Pneumatics, Inc. if
gle upward will adversely affect the system’s you have any questions.
COMMON PROBLEMS FOUND DURING START-UP
1. Blower pumps or gear cases not filled or Protector flanges).

overfilled with oil (Blower Pkg., or Aerolock). 7. Differential pressure gauge not installed (Bin
2. Blower’s vacuum breaker valve and air con- Vent or Filter Receiver).
nections not plumbed correctly. 8. Filter-regulator-gauge kit not installed in com-
3. Motor’s shaft rotation incorrect. (Blower Pkg, pressed air supply line (Bin Vent, Filter Re-
Aerolock, or Exhaust Fan). ceiver, Modular Cartridge Bin Vent, or Mini
4. Filter bags, not installed correctly (Bin Vent, Filter).
Filter Receiver, or Mini Filter). 9. Filter regulator not adjusted to 80-100 PSIG.
5. Compression couplings not installed correctly 10. Electrical connections not properly made
or not tightened securely. from the equipment to the control panel.
6. Shear protector on Aerolock installed back- 11. Compressed air connections to required
wards or with a gasket. (Bead sealant re- equipment not installed or incorrectly in-
quired between mating Aerolock and Shear stalled.
COMPONENT INSTALLATION CHECKLIST
Blower Package breaker valve on vacuum blower packages

1. Blower base securely anchored in place. only.
2. Adequate blower ventilation. 9. Pressure switch wired correctly on pressure
3. Sound shield (if required) anchored securely blower. (115 volt AC or 24 volt DC).
in place and with proper ventilation. 10. Vacuum switch wired correctly on vacuum
4. Blower pump case filled with oil (do not over- blower. (115 volt AC or 24 volt DC).
fill). 11. Pressure differential switch wired correctly
5. Tight hose connection at blower inlet/outlet. on a vacuum/pressure blower. (115 volt AC).
6. Motor wired correctly for proper rotation (230, (Single rail unload blower package).
380, 460, or 575 volt AC). 12. Belt tension and alignment checked and re-
7. Blower’s shaft rotation correct with directional tightened after two hours of operation.
arrow. 13. Silencers anchored securely and properly
8. Proper wiring (115 volt AC or 24 volt DC) and supported.
air connection (80-100 PSI) to the vacuum
606 North Front Street / P.O. Box 17

1 Salina, Kansas 67402-0017
Telephone (785) 825-1611
www.KtronPremier.com
Information Subject to Change Without Notice
Effective 05-01-10
Aerolock Rotary Valve Aeropass Fill Valve

1. Aerolock’s inlet or outlet not exposed. 1. Direction of flow is correct in relation to
Safety Warning: An outlet guard must be tangential scroll on the hopper’s lid.
installed if the Aerolock is positioned in a 2. Tight connections between valve ports and
way that leaves the inlet or outlet exposed. conveying line or hose.
2. Shear protector installed correctly (if applica- 3. Wired correctly between main control panel
ble), with vent stub on the side of upward and valve’s junction box (115 volt AC or 24
rotor rotation. Use bead sealant or caulking volt DC).
between the shear protector’s bottom 4. Compressed air source of 80-100 PSI to
flange and the Aerolock’s top flange, not a solenoid valve.
gasket. 5. Valve diverts correctly. (Can only be di-
3. Aerolock rotation in accordance with direc- verted when no material is being con-
tion of flow arrow on the drive guard. veyed).
4. Flange connections tight and uniform 6. A gasket must be used between Aeropass
against gasket. valve and hopper’s mounting flange.
5. Motor’s gear case filled with oil (do not over Tunnel Diverter Valve
fill). 1. Valve properly supported within the con-
6. Motor wired correctly for counter-clockwise veying line.
rotation. (230, 380, 460, or 575 volt AC) 2. Tight and secure connections for the
7. Drive chain tension adjusted correctly. valves inlet/outlets to the conveying line.
8. Correct settings on variable-speed drive (if 3. Correct wiring from the main control panel
applicable). to the valve’s junction box (115 volt AC or
9. Filter-regulator-gauge kit installed with a 24 volt DC).
compressed air source of 6-10 SCFM. Set 4. Compressed air source of 80-100 PSI to
the pressure so the gauge reads 10 PSI solenoid valve.
above the conveying system’s operating 5. Valve diverts correctly. When the valve is
pressure (air purge seals only). in the divert position, the green dot is visi-
10. Warning decals installed around Aerolock. ble in the plexiglass window.
Filter Receiver
In-Line Filter 1. Tight connection of Filter Receiver to hop-
1. Tight hose connections at in-line filter inlet per with gasket between flanges.
and exhaust. 2. Access door bolted tightly to Filter Re-
2. Compressed air connection of 80-100 PSI ceiver housing.
to the air accumulator (pulse-clean units 3. Filter bags or cartridge filters properly in-
only). stalled.
3. Verify filter cleaning cycle (pulse-clean units 4. Differential pressure gauge installed cor-
only). rectly.
4. Proper electrical connection to main control 5. Filter-regulator-gauge kit installed and
panel (pulse-clean units only 24 volt DC). plumbed correctly.
6. Air pressure to the accumulator recovers to
Diverter Valve 80-100 PSIG after each pulse.
1. Valve properly supported in conveying line. 7. No air leaks in compressed air supply pip-
2. Tight connections between valves inlet / ing.
outlets to the conveying line. 8. Proper wiring to terminals L1/L2 (115 volt
3. Wired correctly between main control panel AC) or terminals Plus/Minus (24volt DC) on
and valves’s junction box (115 volt AC or the timer board.
24 volt DC). 9. Solenoids (pulse-cleaning) operating cor-
4. Compressed air source of 80-100 PSI to rectly.
solenoid valve. 10. Diaphragm valves operating properly.
5. Valve diverts correctly (Can only be diverted 11. “Off” and “On” timers set correctly (timer
when no material is being conveyed). board).

Telephone (785) 825-1611
Effective 05-01-10
Bin Vent and Modular Cartridge Bin Vent volt, 5 amp, single-phase power source.
1. Tight connection of Bin Vent flange to tank/ 7. For any optional wiring connections such
hopper with gasket between mating flanges. as an inhibit circuit, serial communication
(Bin Vent and Modular Cartridge Bin Vent). input, or follower input, consult the instruc-
2. Access door bolted tightly to Bin Vent hous- tions within the electronic Owner’s Manual.
ing (Bin Vent only).
3. Filter bags or cartridge filters properly in- ProBlend Mixer
stalled (Bin Vent only). 1. Proper installation and tight connection of
4. Cartridge Filter properly installed (Modular the mixer frame to the inlet of processing
Cartridge Bin Vent only). machine or extruder (machine mount
5. Differential pressure gauge installed correctly units).
(Bin Vent only). 2. Casters properly bolted to the feet of the
6. Filter-regulator-gauge kit installed and portable base and brakes locked into brak-
plumbed correctly to the accumulator (Bin ing position. If casters not furnished, port-
Vent and Modular Cartridge Bin Vent). able base must be on a level and stable
7. Air pressure recovers to 80-100 PSIG after surface (portable base mount units only).
each pulse (Bin Vent and Modular Cartridge 3. The mixer paddle, bearing boss, motor,
Bin Vent). and mixer hopper are factory installed.
8. No air leaks in compressed air supply piping Ensure no damage has occurred during
(Bin Vent and Modular Cartridge Bin Vent). shipment.
9. Proper wiring to terminals L1/L2 (115 volt AC) 4. Ensure the electrical connection has been
or terminals Plus/Minus (24 volt DC) on the made between the mixer motor and the
timer board (Bin Vent and Modular Cartridge controller.
Bin Vent). 5. Ensure the controller power cord has been
10. Solenoids (pulse-cleaning) operating correctly inserted into an electrical outlet with a 115
(Bin Vent and Modular Cartridge Bin Vent). volt, 5 amp, single-phase power source.
11. Diaphragm valves operating properly (both). 6. For any optional wiring connections such
12. “Off” and “On” timers set correctly (timer as follower input, low level panel, or Master
board) (Bin Vent and Modular Cartridge Bin Controller, consult the instructions within
Vent). the electronic Owner’s Manual.
13. Proper fan installation, adjustment, and rota-
tion (Bin Vent Only). ProRate / Gravimetric Feeder
1. Gravimetric Feeder Central Station is an-
ProRate / ProRate II Feeder chored to a level, stable, flat surface.
1. Proper installation and tight connection of 2. Proper and tight connection of Gravimetric
pedestal to inlet of processing machine or Feeder to the central station.
extruder (if applicable). 3. Proper installation of scale platform with
2. Tight connection of raw material hopper to legs to the central station and to the Gra-
the top of pedestal (if applicable). vimetric Feeder.
3. Proper and tight connection of ProRate body 4. Tight connection of material hoppers to the
to the pedestal or other equipment ProRate inlet flanges.
4. Proper installation of the auger, couplings, 5. Ensure the electrical connection has been
rubber spider, motor, and motor mount made from the motor to the junction box
bracket are critical. Please closely follow the and then to the scale controller.
installation instructions located within the 6. Ensure the electrical connection has been
electronic Owner’s Manual. made to the level control. This will wire
5. Ensure the electrical connection has been into the junction box, and then to the scale
made between the motor and the controller. controller.
6. Ensure the controller power cord has been
inserted into an electrical outlet with a 115

Telephone (785) 825-1611
Effective 05-01-10
7. Ensure the load cells have been properly

wired directly to the scale controller.
8. After the ProRate/Gravimetric Feeder has
been installed, the load cells will need to be
calibrated. Follow all calibration instructions
within the electronic Owner’s Manual.
Butterfly Gate
1. Valve installed with the stem in the horizontal
position for gravity flow discharge from bins
and hoppers. Do not install the gate upside
down.
2. Valve installed with the stem in the vertical
position and the actuator above the valve in
air only lines.
3. Valve installed and properly bolted between
(2) flanges. Gaskets or beat sealant not re-
quired.
4. Compressed air source of 80-100 PSI to the
solenoid valve (air-actuated valves only).
5. Proper electrical connection (115 volt AC or
24 volt DC) between main control panel and
valves junction box (air-actuated valves only).
Knife Gate / Valve

1. Valve installed so that the side marked “seat”
is on the lower pressure side when the valve
in the closed position.
2. Valve properly installed between (2) flanges.
Flange gaskets are required.
3. Avoid supporting or hanging excess weight
from the gate/valve. Unsupported, over-hung
weight above or below the gate/valve can
cause valve deflection-causing the gate/valve
to bind. Large gate/valves (usually 12 inches
or larger) with over-hung air cylinder and
electric actuators may require support to as-
sure gate blade alignment.
4. Proper length of bolts selected so that the
bolts used in the blind holes near the chest
area of the valve do not bottom out when
tightened.
5. Compressed air source of 80-100 PSI to the
solenoid valve (air actuated valves only).
6. Proper electrical connection (115 volt AC or
24 volt DC) between main contact panel and
valve’s junction box (air-actuated valves
only).

Telephone (785) 825-1611
Effective 05-01-10
SERIES4 2400 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION CHECKLIST
Series 2400 Blower Package receiver’s panel/control module. 10 ft. drop

1. Blower base securely anchored in place. cables are supplied in the installation kits.
2. Adequate blower ventilation.
3. Sound shield (if required) anchored securely
in place and with proper ventilation. Series 2400 Communications Cable
4. Blower pump case filled with oil (do not over- Daisy Chain Installation (PLC & MPC)
fill). 1. Run a molded interconnection cable to the
5. Tight hose connection at blower inlet/outlet. first control module.
6. Motor wired correctly for proper rotation (220, 2. Run a molded interconnecting cable between
380, 460, or 575 volt AC). each of the remaining control modules.
7. Motor starter coil wired to 115 volt AC or 24
volt DC.
8. Blower’s shaft rotation correct with directional Series4 2400 Receiver
arrow. 1. Receiver wired and installed correctly.
9. Air connection of 80-100 PSI to the vacuum 2. Air connection of 80-100 PSI compressed air
breaker valve solenoid. to the air accumulator (powder units only).
10. 24 volt electrical connection to the solenoid 3. All receivers wired properly to the Controller
valve thru the communication cable.
11. Belt tension and alignment checked and re- 4. Bag cleaning cycle operating correctly
tightened after two hours of operation. (powder receivers only).
12. Silencers anchored securely and properly 5. Vacuum fill valve operating correctly.
supported. 6. Material pick-up probe adjusted to maintain
steady material flow.
7. Any hose has ground wire.
In-line Filter 8. Proper wiring connection of level sensing
1. Tight hose connections at in-line filter inlet switch to the 2410, 2415, 2420, 2423, and
and exhaust. 2424 Receiver control panel.
2. Compressed air connection of 80-100 PSI to 9. The entire conveying line and the receivers
the air accumulator (pulse-clean filter only). shall be grounded. Any hose sections shall
3. Verify filter cleaning cycle (pulse-clean filter have a copper ground wire molded in the
only). hose. The copper wire shall be grounded at
4. Proper electrical connection 24 volt DC to each end, preferably by hose clamping it to
Controller (pulse-clean filter only). the metal conveying line.
10. Do not support air and conveying line from
the inlet or exhaust of the receiver.
Series 2400 Communications Cable
Trunk/Drop Installation (MPC and PLC)
1. Mount a 3-way “T” connector above each Series 4 Controller
receiver in the system. 1. Do not modify the controller panel or use as a
2. Connect the controller to the first receiver’s junction box. Premier Pneumatics must ap-
“T” connector using the molded interconnect- prove any field modifications to the standard
ing cable. controller panel or the warranty will be
3. Connect each receiver’s “T” connector (in voided.
series) with molded interconnecting cable. 2. Do not run the communications cable in close
Molded interconnecting cable is available proximity.
from Premier in 5 ft., 10 ft., 20 ft., 50 ft., and 3. Do not tie the communications cable to the
100 ft. lengths. Excess cable may be coiled conveying line when routing individual re-
up and tied with a wire tie. ceiver panels.
4. Run a molded drop cable from the bottom of 4. Electrical connection of 115 volt AC or 230
the “T” connector above each receiver to the volt AC.

Telephone (785) 825-1611
Effective 05-01-10
SERIES4 2400 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION CHECKLIST

Machine Loader
1. Loader mounted directly to equipment or a
access ring with bead sealant or gasket be-
tween flanges.
2. Air connection of 80-100 PSI compressed air
to the air accumulator (powder units only).
3. Proper settings in control panel for sensor,
bag pulse, and pulse rate.
4. Bag cleaning cycle operating correctly
(powder units only).
5. Do not support conveying line from the inlet
of the loader.
6. Electrical connection of 115 volt AC or 230
volt AC.

Telephone (785) 825-1611
OPERATING AND
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
In-Line Filter
Read this manual prior to operating or

servicing the equipment. This manual
contains all safety labels and
warnings.
Original Operatinginstruction
0990034606-EN Rev. 1.0.0

Service
If you need assistance, please call your local service center or:
Premier Pneumatics, Inc. Tel. 001 (0) 785 / 825 1611

606 N. Front St. Fax 001 (0) 785 / 825 8759
Salina, KS 67402-0017
K-TRON (U.S.) Tel. 001 (0) 856 / 589 0500

Rt 55 and Rt 553 Fax 001 (0) 856 / 589 8113
Pitman, NJ 08071
K-TRON (Switzerland) Tel. 0041 (0) 62 / 885 7171

Lenzhardweg 43/45 Fax 0041 (0) 62 / 885 7180
CH-5702 Niederlenz
Web: www.ktron.com
Before you call...

£ Do you have alarm displays? Can you eliminate their causes?
£ Have you modified part of the system, product or operating mode?
£ Have you tried to eliminate the fault in accordance with the operating
instructions?
£ Note down the project or job number. This can be found at the machine
or in the project manual. - Example: 400545 or CO140717
Using the manual:

£ This arrow identifies an individual action.
1. Numbers identify a sequence of actions which have to be executed
step-by-step.
V This symbol identifies a general safety note.
Reference to another manual.
Important information.
This symbol indicates that tools are required for the following task.
Specifies where information or a situation must be checked.
Docu-No.: 0990034606-EN “K-Tron assumes no responsibility for damages resulting from misuse of any equipment or negligence on the part of
operating personnel. Further, reference is made to the purchase order, acceptance or other document that contains
Datum: 2009, Nov.30 the express K-Tron disclaimer of warranties for a statement of the provisions limiting or disclaiming certain warranties
with respect to the Company's equipment. Except as otherwise expressly provided by K-Tron in any such document,
Original: 0990034605-EN K-TRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, NOR
ANY OTHER WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO THE EQUIPMENT.”
If an error or omission is found, please contact: documentation@ktron.com.
Table of Contents
1 Safety notes ............................................................. 5

1.1 Safety symbols definitions ......................................... 5
1.1.1 Electrical hazard icon ................................................ 6
1.1.2 Ground icon ............................................................... 6
1.1.3 No hands icon ........................................................... 6
1.1.4 Power icon ................................................................ 6
1.1.5 Ear protection icon .................................................... 6
1.1.6 No access for unauthorized persons ......................... 6
1.2 Responsibilities of the owner .................................... 7
1.3 Proper use ................................................................. 7
1.4 Organizational measures .......................................... 7
1.5 Safety-conscious work .............................................. 8
1.6 Safety devices ........................................................... 8
1.7 High voltage .............................................................. 8
1.8 Additional equipment ................................................. 9
1.9 Customer service and repairs ................................... 9
1.10 Shut-down procedure ................................................ 9
2 Application ............................................................. 10
2.1 Function .................................................................. 10
2.2 Filter types ............................................................... 11
2.2.1 2.2.1 Pulse clean inline filter ................................... 11
2.2.2 Pulse clean inline filtergroup ................................... 11
2.3 Filter components .................................................... 12
2.3.1 Pulse clean inline filter ............................................ 12
2.3.2 Pulse clean inline filtergroup components ............... 13
3 Technical data ....................................................... 14
4 Installation ............................................................. 15
4.1 Transport ................................................................. 15
4.2 Unpacking ............................................................... 16
4.3 In-Line filter mounting .............................................. 16
4.3.1 Cartridge type in-line filter ....................................... 16
4.3.2 Pulse-clean in-line filter ........................................... 17
4.3.3 All in-line filters ........................................................ 17
4.4 Compressed air connections ................................... 18
4.5 Electrical connection ............................................... 19
4.6 Hose assembly ........................................................ 20
5 Start-up .................................................................. 21
Docu-No.: 0990034606-EN Rev. 1.0.0 Page 3

5.1 Start-up checklist ..................................................... 21
6 Operation ............................................................... 22
6.1 Notes on operation .................................................. 22
6.2 Switching on/off ....................................................... 22
7 Filter cleaning ........................................................ 23

7.1 Switching off the installation .................................... 23
7.2 Cleaning .................................................................. 23
8 Maintenance .......................................................... 24
8.1 Maintenance intervals ............................................. 24
8.2 Filter maintenance ................................................... 25
8.2.2 Cartridge type in-line filter ....................................... 27
8.3 Discharge maintenance .......................................... 27
8.4 Discharge gate maintenance .................................. 27
9 Troubleshooting .................................................... 28
9.1 Troubleshooting table .............................................. 28
Page 4 Docu-No.: 0990034606-EN Rev. 1.0.0

Safety notes 1
Safety symbols definitions1.1
1 Safety notes
Installation, commissioning and programming of the specified

equipment should only be undertaken by qualified personnel.
1.1 Safety symbols definitions
V The safety alert symbol is used to alert to the potential personal

injury hazards. Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to
avoid possible injury or death.
V CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not

avoided, may result in property damage.
V CAUTION with safety alert indicates a potentially hazardous

situation which, if not avoided, could lead to light bodily injuries.
V WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not

avoided, could lead to heavy bodily injury or to death.
V DANGER indicates a extremely hazardous situation which, if not


1 Safety notes
1.1.1 Electrical hazard icon
This sign indicates an electrical hazard. It is located on covers and

doors. Only qualified personnel are allowed to remove these covers or
open the doors.
1.1.2 Ground icon
This sign indicates that a ground/PE connection is required.
1.1.3 No hands icon
Do not place hands or other body parts into moving parts or machine.
1.1.4 Power icon
Disconnect power and lock out/tag out equipment before performing

any maintenance to prevent against any unexpected start up.
1.1.5 Ear protection icon
Insure that proper ear protection is worn at all times when near this
equipment
1.1.6 No access for unauthorized persons
No access is allowed for persons unauthorized to work on equipment.

Before performing any maintenance be sure that you know and under-
stand how the equipment operates. Before removing the guard insure
that the equipment is locked out.

Safety notes 1
Responsibilities of the owner1.2
1.2 Responsibilities of the owner
V Ensure that only qualified and trained personnel work with the
conveying equipment.
V Establish personnel responsibilities for operation and
maintenance.
V Ensure that the personnel has read and understood the operating
instructions to all installation components, particularly this chapter
"Safety notes".
V The plant owner must replace damaged or missing components
immediately.
V The plant owner is responsible for compliance with legally
prescribed accident prevention and safety regulations.
1.3 Proper use
V Only operate a conveying device in conjunction with a suitable

controller.
V When processing dangerous materials, also comply with the
safety notes which govern the handling of such materials.
V Never use a conveying device to process materials which may
cause a chemical reaction with the materials of the conveying
device.
V Only operate conveying equipment in accordance with the
specified technical data. Any modifications aimed at increasing the
performance of the conveying equipment are prohibited.
V Comply with the respective operating instructions and observe the
conditions for maintenance.
V Never use a conveying device to process explosive gas or air gas
mix. Danger of explosion!
V Max ignition energy of the conveyed product may not exceed 10
mJ at room temperature.
V Do not convey moist product.
1.4 Organizational measures
V Always keep the operating instructions near the conveying

equipment, within easy reach. Ensure that they are always
complete and legible.
V Observe the safety notes for the connected control devices.
V In addition to the operating instructions, always comply with
generally prescribed safety regulations governing accident
prevention and environmental safety.

1 Safety notes
1.5 Safety-conscious work
V Read the operating instructions, in particular these safety notes,

and follow these instructions.
V Ensure that only authorized personnel enter the working and
danger area of the conveying equipment.
V Any changes (including changes in the operational behavior)
which affect safety must be reported immediately to the
responsible member of the staff.
V Always keep safety in mind while working.
V Do not touch blowers or exhausters while they are operating as
they often reach high temperatures.
V When operating any valve to check its action, be careful not to
have hands near any open ports.
V Before opening or disassembling any part of the conveying
equipment always switch off the main power and air supply.
1.6 Safety devices
V Operating the conveying equipment without safety devices:

– is dangerous for the health and life of the operator or third per-
sons
– can damage the conveying equipment or other material
V Never alter the mechanical safety devices or the electrical control
system for the safety devices. Increased risk of accident.
V Only operate the conveying equipment if all safety devices are
installed and fully functional.
V Check that all safety devices operate properly every day.
V Never open or remove covers or hoods while the equipment is in
operation.
V Never operate the conveying equipment when the housing is open
except sack tip stations.
V Do not modify the electrical safety devices, for example fuses.
Increased risk of accident.
V Only use the specified fuse types when replacing fuses.
V Replace damaged cable joints and connections immediately.
1.7 High voltage
V Only qualified electricians may work on the electrical equipment.

V Protect electrical parts of the conveying equipment against
humidity.

Safety notes 1
Additional equipment1.8
1.8 Additional equipment
V Modifications to the conveying equipment are prohibited.

V The operator is responsible for complying with all safety
regulations related to interoperation with any additional
equipment, e.g. feeding equipment.
1.9 Customer service and repairs
V Have repairs to the conveying device carried out by

– by the responsible Premier / K-Tron customer service.
– or –
– by specialized personnel trained by Premier / K-Tron.
Customer service address is found on the projectmanual.
Only use original Premier / K-Tron parts.
1.10 Shut-down procedure
V The operator is responsible for the proper removal and disposal of

the conveying equipment from service.

2 Application
2.1 Function
2 Application
Typically used on systems where the primary filter utilizes a screen

separator. The 2400 pulse-clean in-line secondary filter can be used
where frequent manual cleaning of the static unit would not be practi-
cal. The filter elements are automatically pulse-cleaned during peri-
ods when the system is not conveying. The 100 mm [4 in] inlet/outlet
configuration uses a large filter cartridge. The smaller 50 and 76 mm
[2 and 3 in] inlet/outlets use filter bags.
2.1 Function
The pulse-clean in-line filter works like a powder filter unit and has
quick-access for easy filter inspection and maintenance. The filters
pulse for a period of time when the blower shuts down. Central system
units for the pulse-clean in-line filter utilize a common vacuum blower
package, and are primarily used on multiple destination applications
where larger conveying rates or long distances are required.
The pulse-clean in-line filter group includes modular in-line filter with
mounting plate, 6 m [20 ft.] of flexible hose, carbon steel support stand
and assembly hardware. This assembly is available for 50, 76 and 100
mm [2, 3 and 4 in] line sizes.

Application 2
Filter types2.2
2.2 Filter types
2.2.1 2.2.1 Pulse clean inline filter
Abb. 2.1 50 & 76 mm (2&3in) Filter
2.2.2 Pulse clean inline filtergroup
Abb. 2.2 100 mm (4in) Filter

2 Application
2.3 Filter components
2.3.1 Pulse clean inline filter

(1) Pulse clean valve
1
(2) Tube sheet
(3) Filter cages
(4) Filter bag
(5) Gasket
2 (6) V-clamp
(7) Tube sheet
5
3 (8) Housing filter
6
4 (9) Gasket
7
(10) V-Clam
(11) Shroud
8
(12) Inlet section assembly
9
(13) Gasket
10 (14) V-Clamp
11 (15) Retainer, gasket seal
(16) Hopper section
12 (17) Proximity switch
13 (18) Disarge gate
(19) Seal, disarge gate
14
15
16
17
18
19
Fig. 2.3 Filter components

Application 2
Filter components2.3
2.3.2 Pulse clean inline filtergroup components

1 (2) Control valve
(3) Silencer
(4) V-Clamp
2 (5) Filter cartridge
(6) Mounting cone
3 (7) Body
(8) Inlet seal
(9) Proximity switch
4 (10) Disarge gate
5 (11) Seal, disarge gate
8
9
10 11
Fig. 2.4 Filter components

3 Technical data
3 Technical data
Manufacturer K-Tron Premier

Designation In-Line Filter
Conformity
or declaration by the manufacturer
Protection class of electrical IP 65 (Solenoid)
components
Max.air pressure for filter 6.9 bar [100 PSI] water and oil-free
cleaning
Noise level < 70 dB (A)
Weight In-Line Filter 23 kg [50 lb.] it depends on configuration
In-Line Filter Group 73 kg [160 lb.] it depends on configuration
Dimensions see dimensional drawing in the system project manual
Operating temperature range -10 to 50°C (14 to 122°F)

Installation 4
Transport4.1
4 Installation
Ambient conditions
V Install the conveying equipment only in surroundings conforming
to the technical data (see section 3 and systems project manual).
V Only have the conveying equipment connected and

commissioned by authorized personnel.
4.1 Transport
V Only have the conveying equipment transported by authorized

and qualified personnel.
V Transport the filter only with a hoisting equipment.
V In order to avoid damage to the filter only use lifting straps with
sufficient lifting capacity for the hoisting equipment (for the weight
of the filter see section 3 and the mechanical drawings).
V The lifting straps must be sufficiently long to avoid too much strain
to the band.
V Filter could over balance.

V Make sure all clamps are securely fastened.
1. Fix the lifting straps at the mounting supports or loop the lifting
straps around the upper extension.
2. Ensure that the lifting straps do not slip (e.g. by using clamps).
Abb. 4.1 Transport

4 Installation
4.2 Unpacking
4.2 Unpacking
1. Protect the cable ducts and air pipes etc. from being damaged be-
fore attaching the slings of the hoisting equipment.
2. Ensure that the slings do not slip (e.g. by using clamps).
3. Remove the filter carefully from the packaging (see section 4.2
Transport).
4. Check whether the supplied goods are complete and check them
for transport damage.
5. Report any damage immediately to shipper and to K-Tron.
4.3 In-Line filter mounting

• Allow sufficient space for maintenance, calibration and inspection
work.
• Compressed Air connections see section 4.4.
4.3.1 Cartridge type in-line filter

1. Mount the In-line Filter to a Premier vertical support stand or a
wall. Position the In-line Filter as close to the blower as possible
(see Abb. 4.2). Proceed to step 6.
Abb. 4.2 Cartridge type in-line filter

Installation 4
In-Line filter mounting4.3
4.3.2 Pulse-clean in-line filter

2. Mount the Pulse-Clean In-line Filter to a Premier vertical support
stand or a wall. Position the Pulse-Clean In-line Filter as close to
the blower as possible.
Abb. 4.3 Pulse-clean in-line filter
3. Ensure that the discharge gate swings freely. If you have not
purchased the fines collection kit, proceed to step 5.
4. Attach the (optional) fines collection kit to the Pulse-Clean In-line
Filter (see Abb. 4.3). It collects the fines trapped by the filter. Ins-
tallation drawings can be found in your system’s owner’s manual.
Proceed to step 6.
5. If a drum is being used to collect fines from the Pulse-Clean Filter,
a mounting ring is required. The mounting ring allows the air from
the filter’s cleaning cycle to escape. Bolt the mounting ring bet-
ween the bottom of the filter and the drum’s lid. The fines collection
kit and/or mounting ring can be purchased by calling Premier’s
Parts Department.
4.3.3 All in-line filters

6. Using flexible hose, connect the blower to the exhaust port of the
In-line Filter. Also use flexible hose to connect the conveying line
to the In-line Filter’s inlet (see Abb. 4.2). Ensure that all connec-
tions are tight.

4 Installation
4.4 Compressed air connections
V Disconnect air supply when disassembling pneumatic equipment.
• The compressed air supply must be clean, dry and oil free.
• Maximum 6.9 bar [100 PSI] from the main supply.

£ Connect a source of 5.5 to 6.9 bar [80 to 100 PSI] of clean, dry,
compressed air to solenoid valve.
• A - Energized
• B - De-Energized 3 1 2 3 1 2
(1) Plant Air in

(2) Exhaust
(3) Plug
3 3
A B
Abb. 4.4 Pulse clean solenoid

Installation 4
Electrical connection4.5
4.5 Electrical connection
Improper connection of the conveying device can cause danger to life

through electric shock.
V The conveying device may only be connected by qualified
electricians.
V Observe the local regulations.
Connect the ground connection to a low-impedance equipotential

bonding (≤ 0.1 Ω), see the grounding information on the conveying
device.
Provide a lockable main switch to disconnect the main power supply

from the conveying device.
Carefully follow all wiring and shielding procedures as indicated on the

provided wiring diagrams and operating instructions of the controls.
1. Connect the conveying device in accordance with the electrical wi-

ring diagram.
2. Ground the conveying device carefully.
£ Follow diagram to connect electrical wiring and compressed air.
(1) 24 DC Signal from control
panel
1 2
(2) Ground
(3) Clean, dry and oil free
3
Compressed air
5.5 - 6.8 Bar [80 - 100 Psi]
Abb. 4.5 Connection diagram

4 Installation
4.6 Hose assembly
4.6 Hose assembly

The entire conveying line and the filters should be grounded. All hose
sections should have a copper ground wire molded in the hose. The
copper wire should be grounded at each end, preferably using hose
clamps, as shown.
1. Conveying line or inlet to
equipment
2. Hose clamp
3. Copper grounding wire
4. Plastic hose with copper 3
1 3 4 5
grounding wire 2
5. Hose shank coupler (quick
fitting) or conveying line
Abb. 4.6 Hose assembly
Installation instructions for transparent plastic hose with ground

wire:
1. Strip out approximately 51 mm [2 in] of the copper ground wire on
each end of the hose.
2. Before assembling, fold the 51mm [2 in] of exposed wire into the
inside of the hose.
3. Slide the hose onto the conveying line, equipment inlet, or quick
fitting.
4. Ensure the copper ground wire is making metal contact before
tightening down the hose clamps.

Start-up 5
Start-up checklist5.1
5 Start-up
V Only operate conveying equipment with all safety devices in place.

V Never use the conveying equipment to process materials which
may cause a chemical reaction with the materials of the conveying
equipment, for example feed materials containing the following
substances:
– Acid
– Iodine
– Chromium
– Bromium
V When conveying dangerous materials observe the safety notes
applying for handling these materials.
5.1 Start-up checklist

Make sure the material hose has a ground wire. Static electricity can
adversely affect the Central Controller and related panels.
1. Check for proper installation of the In-line Filter, ensuring tight ho-
se connections at the inlet and exhaust ports.
2. If the unit is a Pulse-Clean In-line Filter, ensure that there is an air
connection of 5.5 to 6.9 bar [80 to 100 PSI] of clean, dry, com-
pressed air to the air accumulator at the top of the filter.
3. If the unit is a Pulse-Clean In-line Filter, verify that the filter
cleaning cycle is working properly. Listen for two pulses of air at 4-
second intervals inside the filter when the blower shuts down.

6 Operation
6.1 Notes on operation
6 Operation

substances:
– Acid
– Iodine
– Chromium
– Bromium
6.2 Switching on/off

£ Switch the conveying equipment on/off with the provided controls
For more information see system operating instructions and functional
design in the systems project manual.

Filter cleaning 7
Switching off the installation7.1
7 Filter cleaning
When carrying out maintenance work on the switched-off conveying

device there is a danger of injury through unintentional switching-on.
V Switch off the feeding system before carrying out maintenance
work on the conveying device and secure it against unintentional
restarting (see chapter 7.1).
7.1 Switching off the installation
1. Switch off the machine at the main switch.

2. Secure the main switch with a lock.
3. Attach a danger sign to the main switch or perform a lock-out, tag-
out procedure.
4. Turn off compressed air for all the pneumatic devices.
7.2 Cleaning
Aggressive and toxic cleaning agents damage the filter and represent
an increased accident risk.
V Do not clean the filter with corrosive cleaning agents.
V Use only safe cleaning agents and disinfectants in filter used for
foods.
V Ensure that no cleaning agent residues are left on the components
which come into contact with the feed material.
V Do not clean the filter with high-pressure devices.

8 Maintenance
8.1 Maintenance intervals
8 Maintenance

equipment there is a danger of injury through unintentional switching-
on.
V Switch off the conveying equipment before carrying out
maintenance work on the equipment and secure it against
unintentional restarting (see section 7.1).
V Before removing the lid to access the filter media, detach the air
line from the air accumulator/vacuum fill valve.
V Only qualified and trained personnel may carry out maintenance
work on the conveying equipment.
V Only qualified electricans may work on the electrical equipment.

Periodic cleaning is recommended.
Element Checkpoints Interval
Mechanics £ Eliminate dust accumulation more £ As required

than 5 mm [0.2 in] through
cleaning.
£ Check compressed air
£ Empty water-separator
£ Check convey and vacuum line
mechanical connections for tight-
ness.
£ Check seal rings for damage
£ Check safety symbols at the equip-
ment for legibility and
completeness.
£ Check pressure regulator m Annually
£ Check reverse jet pulse valves m 6 months
£ Change filters m As required
Electric £ Check ground wires and static m As required
bonding.
£ Check all electrical connections

Maintenance 8
Filter maintenance8.2
8.2 Filter maintenance
line from the air accumulator/vacuum fill valve.
If cross-contamination is a concern, it is strongly recommended that

the filter assembly be completely replaced during product change-
over. If using pulse-cleaned filter media, a new tube sheet and filter
bags/ cages will be required. A filter assembly is available from the
Premier Spare Parts Department.

1. Access the bags by removing the top band clamp and the In-line
Filter’s lid. Remove the tube sheet and bag assembly from the In-
line Filter.
2. Check to ensure that the filter bags ar not dust laden, worn, or
damp. If the bags need to be cleaned, blow them clean (from the
inside to the outside) with compressed air. If the bags are clean
and not worn continue with step 9.
Abb. 8.1 Remove tube sheet
3. To access the bags for a more complete cleaning or replacement,

place the filter bag assembly on a work table. Loosen the screws,
and remove the tube sheet adapter plate. Pull the filter bag cages
from the filter bags.
Abb. 8.2 Filter bags

8 Maintenance
8.2 Filter maintenance
4. The filter bags snap ring secures it to the tube sheet. To remove
the bag, place your thumb on the outside edge of the bags snap
ring. Press in firmly popping the bag out of the bottom side of the
tube sheet, as shown. Repeat step 4 for each bag.
5. Wash the bags in cold water without detergent, and hang or tum-
ble dry on a “no-heat“ dryer setting.
Note: Do not dry clean or use heat or detergent to clean the bags, as
damage will occur.
6. If the bags are worn, replace them with new bags. Replacement
bags and/or complete filter bag assemblies are available as spare
parts from Premier. If the bags are damp or encrusted, before
cleaning or replacement, see section 9.1.
Abb. 8.3 Remove filter
7. To install the new bags, fold the snap ring in half and position it in
the tube sheet as shown. Form the snap ring into position by run-
ning your hand around the inside of the bag until it is firmly seated
in the tube sheet.
8. Place the filter bag cages inside each bag. Fasten the adapter pla-
te back into position. Tightening the screws until you feel a slight
resistance from the filter bags.
Note: Ensure that the gasket on the edge of the tube sheet is not
buckled. If worn, replace it with a new gasket.
9. Place the tube sheet/filter bag assembly in the filter. Reassemble
the unit, securing the lid with the v-band clamp.
Abb. 8.4 Replacement filter

Maintenance 8
Discharge maintenance8.3
8.2.2 Cartridge type in-line filter

1. Access the filter assembly by removing the top band clamp and
the In-line Filter’s lid. Remove the filter assembly from the In-line
Filter.
2. Check the filter cartridge and sponge sleeve for wear or dust coa-
ting. If the sponge sleeve of the filter assembly needs to be clea-
ned, blow it with compressed air. If it is clean and not worn, conti-
nue with step 7 (sponge sleeve not required on 4” pulse clean unit,
see Abb. 8.6).
3. If the filter needs a more complete cleaning, remove the top thumb
screw and disassemble the filter assembly.
4. The filter cartridge may be cleaned by blowing the length of each
fold from the inside to the outside with clean compressed air. The
sponge sleeve may be washed in warm water without detergent.
Do not use heat to dry the sponge sleeve. Hang dry, or tumble dry
in a cool dryer.
Abb. 8.5 Filter assembly
5. If the sponge sleeve or filter cartridge is worn, replace it. Replace-

ment filter components are available as spare parts from Premier.
6. Reassemble the filter assembly, ensuring that the gasket on the
edge of the filter seal plate is not buckled.
7. Reassemble the In-line Filter, securing the lid with the band clamp.
Abb. 8.6 Filter cartridge
8.3 Discharge maintenance
Cartridge type in-line filter

£ If your unit is a cartridge-type In-line Filter, the discharge cap will
need to be opened to empty the dust periodically.
8.4 Discharge gate maintenance
Pulse-clean in-line filter

£ Check for wear on the discharge gate’s rubber seal to ensure a
tight seal, and replace if necessary.

9 Troubleshooting
9.1 Troubleshooting table
9 Troubleshooting
Eliminating faults in a conveying equipment which is running can

cause serious accidents.
V Switch off the conveying equipment before every intervention and
secure it against unintentional restarting (see chapter 7.1).
1. Always switch off the conveying equipment before carrying out re-
pairs.
2. Check the conveying equipment (see chapter 9.1).
3. Please observe the error messages which are displayed on the
connected control device or host computer (see operating instruc-
tions for the relevant control device).
4. Document faults and call the local service center
(customer service see inside cover).
Error Cause Remedy
System does not • Leak in system m Check that all valves are closed
convey enough ma- correctly. Check all connections
terial and seals are secure and leak-free.
m Check the discharge gate for pro-
per sealing. A discharge gate seal
is available as a spare part from
Premier.
m Ensure that the hose connections
at the inlet and exhaust ports are
tight.
• Blocked filter m Check all filters. Clean or replace if

necessary.
m Check for a proper pulsing cycle of
two pulses at 4-second intervals
when the blower shuts down.
m Check for the proper operation of
the timer and flasher in the In-line
Filter’s control panel. A timer and
flasher are available as spare parts
from Premier.

Troubleshooting 9
Troubleshooting table9.1
Error Cause Remedy
Diaphragm valve • Diaphragm valve stays open m If the diaphragm valve stays open,
malfunction compressed air will flow conti-
nuously through the filter bags. The
bleed hole in the valve may be ob-
structed. Disassemble the valve
and clean the bleed hole, or repla-
ce the valve.
• Diaphragm valve stays closed m If the diaphragm valve stays
closed, compressed air will not pul-
se the filter bags. The diaphragm
inside the valve may be broken.
Replace the valve, if necessary.
• Diaphragm valve is not working m Check for tight connections from
the diaphragm valve to the air ac-
cumulator and housing.
m Check bag pulse solenoid.
Bag pulse solenoid • Malfunction from solenoid valve m Check for dirt in the solenoid valve.
malfunction Clean with compressed air.
m If a continuous flow of air is felt from
the exhaust port, the solenoid ar-
mature is not seated properly. Re-
move the valve core, and clean out
any dirt, scale, or rust. If the valve
core is damaged or worn, it will
need to be replaced.
m If there is no air flow from the ex-
haust port of the solenoid valve,
check for the correct electrical con-
nection to the solenoid valve.
m If there is correct voltage to the so-
lenoid valve (24 volts DC), check
for a drop in voltage across the so-
lenoid coil during its designated
pulse cycle. If full voltage is detec-
ted across the coil during the pulse
cycle, the coil may be burned out.
m Ensure that there is an air connec-
tion of 5.5 to 6.9 bar [80 to 100 PSI]
of clean, dry air to the solenoid val-
ve.

9 Troubleshooting
Error Cause Remedy
Damp or encrusted • Moisture in the compressed air m Check for moisture in the com-
filter bags pressed air source connected to
the in-line filter. The air must be
dry.
• Pulse valve not working m The solenoid and diaphragm
valves, which control the pulsing of
the bags, may not be operating
properly.
• Pulse filter setting m Check for a proper pulsing cycle of
two pulses at 4-second intervals
when the blower shuts down.
• Dirty filter m Disassemble the tube sheet and fil-
ter bag assembly and clean the
bags.
Poor filter life • Rough surfaces m Check for rough surfaces on the fil-
ter bag cages.
• Moisture in the compressed air m Ensure that the air from the com-
pressed air source is dry. Moisture
on the bags causes rot, shortening
the bag life.
• Dust and conveying air m Check the dust and conveying air
for corrosive conditions.
Dirty exhaust air • Filter installation m Check for proper installation of the
filter bags or filter element.
• Damaged filter m Check the filter for wear or holes,
and replace if needed.
• Dirty air m Ensure that the air from the com-
pressed air source is clean.
Sluggish pulsing • Less air pressure m Ensure that the air pressure in the
air accumulator recovers quickly to
a pressure of 5.5 to 6.9 bar [80 to
100 PSI] after each pulse.
• Problems with diaphragm valve m The diaphragm valve may not be
operating properly.

OPERATING AND
Series 4 MPC Central Controller

warnings.
Original Operating Instruction
0990034605-EN Rev. 1.0.1
Service

606 N. Front St. Fax 001 (0) 785 / 825 8759
Salina, KS 67402-0017
K-TRON (U.S.) Tel. 001 (0) 856 / 589 0500

Rt 55 and Rt 553 Fax 001 (0) 856 / 589 8113
Pitman, NJ 08071

Industrie Lenzhard Fax 0041 (0) 62 / 885 7180
CH-5702 Niederlenz
Web: www.ktron.com
Before you call...

⇒ Do you have alarm displays? Can you eliminate their causes?
⇒ Have you modified part of the system, product or operating mode?
⇒ Have you tried to eliminate the fault in accordance with the operating
instructions?
⇒ Note down the project or job number. This can be found at the machine
or in the project manual.
• Example: 0400545
Using the manual:

⇒ This arrow identifies an individual action.
step-by-step.
▲This symbol identifies a general safety note
If an error or omission is found, please contact:

documentation@ktron.com.
Datum: 2009/Nov/05 the express K-Tron disclaimer of warranties for a statement of the provisions limiting or disclaiming certain warranties
Table of Contents
1 Safety Notes ......................................................................................................................... 5

1.1 Safety symbols definitions ..................................................................................................... 5
1.1.1 Electrical Hazard Icon ............................................................................................................ 6
1.1.2 Ground Icon ........................................................................................................................... 6
1.1.3 Power Icon ............................................................................................................................. 6
1.2 Proper use ............................................................................................................................. 7
1.3 Organizational measures ....................................................................................................... 7
1.4 Operator’s responsibilities ..................................................................................................... 7
1.5 Safety conscious operation ................................................................................................... 7
1.6 Safety Devices ....................................................................................................................... 8
1.7 High voltage ........................................................................................................................... 8
1.8 Additional Equipment ............................................................................................................. 8
1.9 Customer Service and Repairs .............................................................................................. 8
1.10 Shut-down procedure ............................................................................................................ 8
2 Application and use ............................................................................................................ 9

2.0.1 Selection receiver type ........................................................................................................ 10
2.1 Series 4 MPC Overview ...................................................................................................... 10
2.2 Series 4 MPC operator interface ......................................................................................... 11
2.2.1 LED display function ............................................................................................................ 11
2.2.2 Keypad functions ................................................................................................................. 12
2.3 Receiver Panel .................................................................................................................... 14
2.3.1 Receiver Panel Overview .................................................................................................... 14
2.3.2 LED display function ............................................................................................................ 14
3 Technical data .................................................................................................................... 15
4 Installation .......................................................................................................................... 16
4.1 Unpacking ............................................................................................................................ 16
4.2 Mechanical Installation ........................................................................................................ 16
4.3 Addressing Receiver Panels ............................................................................................... 17
4.4 Electrical connection ............................................................................................................ 18
4.4.1 Point to Point Wiring ............................................................................................................ 19
4.4.2 Series 4 MPC Terminals ...................................................................................................... 20
4.4.3 Receiver Communication Network Wiring ........................................................................... 21
4.4.4 Trunk line cable ................................................................................................................... 22
4.4.5 Incoming Supply Power ....................................................................................................... 23
4.4.6 Connecting the KCM Refill Request .................................................................................... 23
5 Operation and programming ............................................................................................ 24

5.1 Operating level .................................................................................................................... 25
5.1.1 System status screen .......................................................................................................... 25
5.1.2 Example 1 of system status screen. .................................................................................... 25

5.1.3 Example 2 of system status screen. .................................................................................... 25
5.1.4 Example 3 of system status screen ..................................................................................... 26
5.1.5 Alarm display ....................................................................................................................... 27
5.1.6 Screen contrast adjustment ................................................................................................. 28
5.1.7 Ram clear procedure ........................................................................................................... 28
5.2 Programming level ............................................................................................................... 29
6 Starting system .................................................................................................................. 31

6.1 Network polling at system power up .................................................................................... 31
6.2 Program Setup ..................................................................................................................... 31
6.3 Starting conveying process .................................................................................................. 32
6.4 Stopping conveying process ................................................................................................ 32
7 Programming reference .................................................................................................... 33

7.1 Menu structure ..................................................................................................................... 33
7.2 Receiver setup menu ........................................................................................................... 34
7.2.1 Setup parameter sub-menu .................................................................................................35
7.2.2 Hardware parameter sub-menu ........................................................................................... 38
7.3 Blower setup menu .............................................................................................................. 40
7.4 System parameter menu ..................................................................................................... 42
8 Transportation, Storage, Disposal ................................................................................... 44

8.1 Notes on transportation ....................................................................................................... 44
8.2 Notes on storage ................................................................................................................. 44
8.3 Notes on Disposal ................................................................................................................ 44
9 Maintenance ....................................................................................................................... 45
9.0.1 Required skills/training for maintenance of the Series 4
MPC ..................................................................................................................................... 45
9.0.2 General tools required ......................................................................................................... 45
9.1 Preventive maintenance ...................................................................................................... 45
10 Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................ 46
10.1 System alarm table .............................................................................................................. 46
10.2 Receiver alarm table ............................................................................................................ 47

Safety Notes 1
Safety symbols definitions 1.1
1 Safety Notes

V The safety alert symbol is used to alert to the potential personal in-
jury hazards. Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to

V CAUTION with safety alert indicates a potentially hazardous situ-

ation which, if not avoided, could lead to light bodily injuries.



1 Safety Notes
1.1.1 Electrical Hazard Icon

open the doors.
1.1.2 Ground Icon
This symbol shows an electrical ground or PE connection.
1.1.3 Power Icon
Power off and disconnect air supply before working on the equipment.

Safety Notes 1
Proper use 1.2
1.2 Proper use
V Only operate the Series 4 MPC in conjunction with the equipment

from K-Tron.
V Only operate the Series 4 MPC in accordance with the specified
technical data.
V Do not operate where there is a risk of explosion.
V Do not use the equipment in a manner not intended by the
manufacturer.
V Observe the safety notes for the connected devices.

V Always keep the device operating instructions within easy reach.
Ensure that they are always complete and legible.
1.4 Operator’s responsibilities
Series 4 MPC.
maintenance.
V Ensure that personnel have read and understood the operating
instructions to all installation components, particularly these safety
notes.
V The operator must have damaged or missing components
replaced immediately.
V The user of the Series 4 MPC is responsible for compliance with
the legally prescribed accident and safety regulations.
1.5 Safety conscious operation
V Any changes which affect safety must be immediately reported to

the responsible member of staff.
V Perform all operations with safety in mind.

1 Safety Notes
1.6 Safety Devices
1.6 Safety Devices
V The electrical safety devices must not be altered. This increases

the danger of accidents.
V Replace damaged cables and connections immediately.
V Only operate the equipment if all safety devices are installed and
fully functional.
V Never open or remove covers or enclosures while the equipment
is in operation.
1.7 High voltage
V High voltage of 230 V may be present on the Series 4 MPC.

V Switch off the power to the Series 4 MPC before any disassembly,
maintenance and repair work.
V Only qualified electricians may work on the Series 4 MPC.
V Protect the Series 4 MPC against moisture entrance.
1.8 Additional Equipment
V Modifications to the Series 4 MPC are prohibited.

regulations related to operation with the equipment.
1.9 Customer Service and Repairs
V The Series 4 MPC may only be repaired by

-your authorized Premier or K-Tron customer service center
or
-qualified, trained personnel.
V Only use original K-Tron Premier parts for repairs.
V Disconnect the Series 4 MPC from the power supply and controls
before removal from service.
V Service personnel are responsible for the proper removal of the
Series 4 MPC from service.

Application and use 2
Shut-down procedure 1.10
2 Application and use
The Series 4 MPC is designed to control a single vacuum sequencing

system controlling up to 24 vacuum receivers. Receivers are serviced
one at a time with those calling for material first, being serviced first.
Four "types" of receivers can be controlled by the Series 4 MPC in any

order or any combination. These four receiver types are:
1. Gravity-Time:
This receiver type fills by time and discharges immediately after
filling via a gravity gate. This type of receiver is used to keep a
vessel below it full. A call for material is established after material
is discharged and the gravity gate swings closed. When the vessel
below is full the receiver gravity gate is held open by material and
the receiver goes into a wait state.
2. Gravity-Level:
Similar to the Gravity-Time receiver except material fills to a level
switch in the receiver instead of by time. A Gravity-Level receiver
is used in applications where assuring material presence in the
receiver is critical. Like the Gravity-Time receiver this type of
receiver is also used to keep a vessel below it full. It dumps
immediately after filling via a gravity gate and calls for material
when the gravity gate swings closed after dumping.
3. Power-Time:
Fills by time and holds material in the receiver until the power
dump gate is open. This type of receiver is used to refill a
gravimetric feeder positioned below it. The feeder's refill request
contacts are wired to the Series 4 Receiver panel's dump request
input. Once the receiver is full the Series 4 will monitor this input
opening the dump gate when it is received. The dump gate will
remain open until the programmed dump time expires or the dump
request input is lost. The closing of the dump gate establishes a
call for material.
4. Power-Level:
Similar to the Power-Time receiver except material fills to a level
switch in the receiver instead of by time. A Power-Level receiver is
used in applications where assuring material presence in the
receiver is critical. Like the Power-Time receiver this type of
receiver is used to refill a gravimetric feeder positioned below it.
The feeder's refill request contacts are wired to the Series 4
Receiver panel's dump request input. Once the receiver is full the
Series 4 will monitor this input opening the dump gate when it is
received. The dump gate will remain open until the programmed
dump time expires or the dump request input is lost. The closing
of the dump gate establishes a call for material.

2.1 Series 4 MPC Overview
2.0.1 Selection receiver type

Receiver material level switch present
NO YES
Power dump NO Gravity-Time Gravity-Level

gate present
YES Power-Time Power-Level
Fig. 2.1 Selection receiver type
2.1 Series 4 MPC Overview

The controller consists of a microprocessor central control unit which
features an easy-to-use, touch-sensitive keypad. The operator con-
trols the whole system, including turning receivers on and off, setting
draw times and starting the systems blower package from one central
Series 4 MPC
location.
The Series 4 MPC can be integrated into the K-Tron SmartConnex
feeder controls, providing one simple control solution for both feeders
and vacuum sequencing receivers. It can operate as a slave to the K-
Vision Line Controller or K-Tron Smart Commander process visualiza-
tion software. The unit is shipped pre-programmed, eliminating com-
plex logic programming.
Fig. 2.2 Series 4 MPC

Series 4 MPC operator interface 2.2
2.2 Series 4 MPC operator interface
Series 4 MPC
• LED Display (Status Blower)

MAIN BLOWER BACKUP BLOWER
* * * STOPPED * * *
01: ON • Alpha/numeric display with four lines displaying machine operating
values, status information and programming data
MENU HOME ALARM
7 8 9
RUN
4 5 6 • Keypad
STOP
1 2 3
ESC C 0 ENTER
! CAUTION - Disconnect power before opening.

115/230 VAC, 50/60 HZ, 200 Watts (Max)
Fig. 2.3 Series 4 MPC Faceplate
2.2.1 LED display function
LED LED name Function
Blower LED Off when blower is not running.

Orange when blower is running with vacuum
breaker open.
Green when blower is running with vacuum
breaker closed.

2.2 Series 4 MPC operator interface
2.2.2 Keypad functions

Key layout Key name Function
MENU Press to go to the main menu of the pro-

gramming level.
See section 7.1 for menu structure.
MENU
HOME Press to go to the system status screen.
HOME
ALARM Press to go to the alarm screen. With alarm

screen displayed press to acknowledge and
clear alarms.
Alarm
UP Press to scroll up.
DOWN Press to scroll down.
ESC Press to move back one screen.
ESC
Table page 1 of 2

Series 4 MPC operator interface 2.2
Key layout Key name Function
ENTER Press to navigate to selected screen or

accept numeric input.
ENTER
RUN Press to activate system
RUN
STOP Press to deactivate the system
STOP
0 to 9 Numeric keypad.
0 _ 9
C Clears the last character entered.
Table page 2 of 2

2.3 Receiver Panel
2.3 Receiver Panel
2.3.1 Receiver Panel Overview
Series 4 2400 Control
Fig. 2.4 Receiver board overview
2.3.2 LED display function
Dump Fill
LED LED
Fig. 2.5 Receiver board LED’s
LED name Function
Fill Off when receiver is waiting or programmed off.

Orange when receiver is calling for material.
Green when receiver is filling.
Blinking red indicates a fill cycle alarm.
Dump Off when receiver is not full.
Orange when receiver is full and waiting to dump.
Green when receiver is dumping.
Blinking red indicates a dump cycle alarm.

Technical data 3
Receiver Panel 2.3
3 Technical data
Specification Limitations and Notations

Manufacturer Premier Pneumatics, Inc.
Device name Series 4 MPC
Device marking
Service Application Must be installed in an industrial or manufacturing power environment.

Connection in a residential power system is not permitted.
Power line/supply 100-240 VAC (+10% - 15%)
Line frequency 47-63 Hz
Maximum Input 300 watts
Protection Class IP65, Nema 4, Nema 12
Operating Temperature -10 .. 50 degrees C
(Central Unit)
Operating Temperature -10 .. 60 degrees C
(Receiver Unit)
Storage Temperature -30 .. 70 degrees C
Ventilation Required No
Maximum ambient humidity Up to 95% without condensation
Pollution degree Category I
Overvoltage category Category II
Terminal Block Ratings Max wire size 2.5 mm2 or 12 AWG
Min wire size 0.2 mm2 or 24 AWG
Max rated contact current 12 A
Max rated contact voltage 250 V
Max screw terminal torque 0.5 Nm
Surge immunity Meets EN61000-4-5
Electrical Equipment safety Meets EN61010-1
Electrical emissions Meets EN61326
Electrical immunity Meets EN61326
Size 305 mm [12 in] x 254 mm [10 in] x 127 mm [5 in]
Weight 1.5 Kg [3.3 lbs]

4 Installation
4.1 Unpacking
4 Installation
V Ensure that the Series 4 MPC is connected and put into operation
only by authorized personnel.
4.1 Unpacking
Carefully unpack the Series 4 MPC from the shipping container and
check that all items have been supplied.
4.2 Mechanical Installation

1. Mount each Series 4 2400 receiver
(Reference receiver manual for mounting detail)
2. Mount the Series 4 MPC to a sturdy, vibration free surface.
Overall dimensions are shown in Fig. 4.1. Dimensions are in mm [in].
203
[8]
Series 4 MPC
324 305
[12.75] [12]
254
[10]
(4) 8 [.31] DIA

MOUNTING HOLES
127
[5]
Fig. 4.1 Series 4 MPC Dimensions

Installation 4
Addressing Receiver Panels 4.3
4.3 Addressing Receiver Panels
Each receiver panel in your system must have a unique address.
Valid addresses are 1 through 24. The address is set using the two
rotary switches on the receiver panel board. See Fig. 4.2. The X10
switch sets the tens position and the X1 switch sets the ones position.
Example: Address 18 would be entered by setting the X10 switch to 1
and the X1 switch to 8.
X10
SWITCH
X1
SWITCH
Fig. 4.2 Address setting

4 Installation
Improper connection of the device can cause danger to life through

electric shock.
V The device may only be connected by qualified electricians.
• Carefully follow all wiring procedures as indicated on the provided

wiring diagrams and operating instructions of the controls.
• Field wiring by customer

bonding (≤ 0.1 Ω), see the grounding information on the device.

from the device.

Installation 4
Electrical connection 4.4
4.4.1 Point to Point Wiring

The following devices require direct, point to point, wiring from the Se-
ries 4 MPC to the device.
Blower Motor Controls, Vacuum Breaker Solenoids, Blower Inline Fil-

ter Pulse Clean Solenoids, Alarm Device, and Inhibit Input.
Determine which of these devices apply to your system and Refer to

Fig. 4.4 for wiring detail.
Series 4 MPC BlowerMotor Series 2400

Controller Starter Panel Blower
Series 4 MPC
MAIN BLOWER BACKUP BLOWER

T
MENU HOME ALARM
7 8 9
RUN
4 5 6
STOP
1 2 3
ESC C 0 ENTER
! CAUTION - Disconnect power before opening.

115/230 VAC, 50/60 HZ, 200 Watts (Max)
CAUTION: HIGH VOLTAGE

DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE WITHOUT
FIRST DISCONNECTING POWER SUPPLY.
THE USE OF A NON-CONDUCTIVE TOOL
IS RECOMMENDED FOR ALL ADJUSTMENTS
WITHIN THIS ELECTRICAL ENCLOSURE.
COMMUNICATION COMMUNICATION COMMUNICATION COMMUNICATION COMMUNICATION COMMUNICATION COMMUNICATION COMMUNICATION

IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT
FILL VALVE PULSE CLEAN FILL VALVE PULSE CLEAN FILL VALVE PULSE CLEAN FILL VALVE PULSE CLEAN
INHIBIT INHIBIT INHIBIT INHIBIT
FILL AUX DUMP GATE FILL AUX DUMP GATE FILL AUX DUMP GATE FILL AUX DUMP GATE
DUMP REQUEST CALL REQUEST DUMP REQUEST CALL REQUEST DUMP REQUEST CALL REQUEST DUMP REQUEST CALL REQUEST
RATIO/PURGE RATIO/PURGE RATIO/PURGE RATIO/PURGE

RECEIVER LEVEL RECEIVER LEVEL RECEIVER LEVEL RECEIVER LEVEL
Series 4 2400 Control Series 4 2400 Control Series 4 2400 Control Series 4 2400 Control
Receivers 1 2...22 23 24
Fig. 4.3 Wiring example

4 Installation
4.4.2 Series 4 MPC Terminals
Dashed lines indicate field wiring to be done by customer.
Fig. 4.4 Point to point wiring

Installation 4
4.4.3 Receiver Communication Network Wiring
System Limits:
Trunk Line Length: (2) Lines Not to Exceed 125 m [400 ft] each or
250m [800 ft] Total
Number of Receivers: (24) Total with (12) Maximum per Trunk Line
Using a K-Tron Premier pre-molded cable, run a trunk line cable from
one of the two quick connect sockets located on the bottom of the Se-
ries 4 MPC control panel to the “Communication In” port of the first re-
ceiver panel. Use addition cables to connect the “Communication Out”
port of each panel to the “Communication In” port of next receiver.
A second trunk line can be used if the Series 4 MPC is located be-
tween receivers.
Series 4 MPC
Fig. 4.5 Receiver communication network “daisy-chain“ wiring option
Series 4 MPC
Fig. 4.6 Receiver communication network “trunk drop“ wiring option

4 Installation
4.4.4 Trunk line cable

Pre-terminated “quick connect“ trunk line cable is available in lengths
of 2 m [6.6 ft.], 3 m [9.8 ft.], 6 m [19.7 ft.], 16 m [52.5 ft.]
and 32 m [105 ft.].
Access cable can be coiled and wire tied.
Bulk trunk line cable is also available along with male and female field-
attachable connectors.
Call the factory for ordering details
(1) Premolded trunk line cable

(2) Optional field attachable connectors when using bulk cable
(3) Optional Tee for “trunk drop“ style installation
Fig. 4.7 Pre-terminated “quick

connect“ trunk line cable
Wiring detail for field attachable connectors when using bulk cable
FIELD ATTACHABLE
CONNECTOR WIRING
MALE
1 5
Drain Blue
2 4
Red White
3
Black
FEMALE
5 1
Blue Drain
4 2
White Red
3
Black
Fig. 4.8 Wiring detail trunk line cable

Installation 4
4.4.5 Incoming Supply Power
Improper connection of the device can cause danger to life through

electric shock.
V The device may only be connected by qualified electricians.

bonding (≤ 0.1 Ω), see the grounding information on the device.

from the device.
Connect 88-264 VAC, 47-63 Hz; 500 Watt, single phase power to the
Series 4 MPC as shown on Fig. 4.9
Fig. 4.9 Series 4 MPC power supply
4.4.6 Connecting the KCM Refill Request

If a receiver has a power gate it will be suplied wiht a quick connect
cable connected to port C6 of the receiver pannel (PPI part# 2109-99).
The cable will have a red jacket on the quick connect end and flying
leads on the opposite end. Connect the flying lead wires to a refill re-
quest set of dry contacts. This will typically be terminals J5-4 and J-5-
5 on a K-TRON KCM panel. If the refill request is coming from another
source ohter than a KCM simply wire the leads to a set of dry contacts
that close when requesting material.

5 Operation and programming
The Series 4 MPC controller operates at two levels:

Operating level - System status screen
• Press to access the system status screen.

HOME
Receiver 19 - 24
Receiver 13 - 18
Receiver 7 - 12
• Press or to scroll up and down.
Receiver 1 - 6
Fig. 5.1 Operating Level
Programming level
SYSTEM PARAMETER The main menu consists of 3 sub-menus. See section 7.1 for com-
BLOWER SETUP plete menu tree.
RECEIVER SETUP
• Press to access the menu. All the receiver and system

MENU
parameters are displayed for configuring.
• Press or to scroll up and down on the screen.
• Press ESC to exit menus and submenus or cancel the entry.
Fig. 5.2 Programming Level

Operation and programming 5
Operating level 5.1
5.1 Operating level
5.1.1 System status screen
Press at any time to display the system status screen.

HOME
The first line displays the status of the system as well as the informa-
tion related to the currently active receiver. Lines 2 thru 4 display the
receiver number and status of each receiver panel connected to the
Series 4 MPC
5.1.2 Example 1 of system status screen.

• The system is ON.
ON FILL:15 12s • Receivers 12, 13, 14, 15, 21 and 22 are connected and
12: WAIT 13: WAIT communicating with the Series 4 MPC.
14: FULL 15: FILL
21: OFF 22: FULL • Receiver 15 is currently filling with 12 seconds remaining in its fill
cycle.
• Receivers 12 and 13 are turned on and waiting for a call for material
to be established.
• Receivers 14 and 22 are turned on and full, waiting for a dump
request.
• Receiver 21 is turned off.
Fig. 5.3 Example 1 of system status
screen
5.1.3 Example 2 of system status screen.

• The system is ON.
ON FILL:10 M:1 1.7s • Receivers 8 and 10 are connected and communicating with the
08: DUMP 10: FILL Series 4 MPC.
• Receiver 10 is equipped for a ratio valve and is filling with
material 1.
• Receiver 8 is on and dumping.
screen

5.1 Operating level
5.1.4 Example 3 of system status screen

• The system is STOPPED and inactive.
* * * STOPPED * * * • The maximum number of 24 receivers are connected and
01: ON 02: ON communicating to the Series 4 MPC.
03: ON 04: ON
04: ON 05: ON • Receivers 1 thru 12 are turned on and receivers 13 thru 24 are
turned off.
Press
* * * STOPPED * * *
07: ON 08: ON
09: ON 10: ON
11: ON 12: ON
Press
* * * STOPPED * * *
13: OFF 14: OFF
15: OFF 16: OFF
17: OFF 18: OFF
Press
* * * STOPPED * * *
19: OFF 20: OFF
21: OFF 22: OFF
23: OFF 24: OFF

screen

Operating level 5.1
5.1.5 Alarm display

When an alarm is registered, the first line, toggles between the system
status line and an alarm banner. The receiver, on the display, associ-
ated with the alarm will also toggle between receiver status and an
alarm banner.
When an alarm is indicated on the system status screen.
Alarm 1. Press .
Alarm
2. Read the alarm display.
3. Acknowledge the alarm signal by pressing .

Alarm
4. Clear the alarm signal by pressing again.

Alarm
5. To return to the normal display Press ESC or .

HOME
Fig. 5.6 Alarm key usage
For alarm handling details see section 10.

The alarm relay is triggered whenever an alarm is active. See Fig. 4.4
for optional alarm device wiring.

5.1 Operating level
5.1.6 Screen contrast adjustment

To change the display contrast, two buttons must be pressed at the
same time.
m Hold the and press the or to

ENTER
change the display contrast.
5.1.7 Ram clear procedure

To clear the programmed parameters and restore the Series 4 MPC
to factory defaults hold C during power-up.

Programming level 5.2
5.2 Programming level
• Press or to scroll up and down on the screen.
• The ‘>’ on the left side of the display shows the active menu or
variable to be selected.
To switch to the programming mode:

MAIN MENU
<---
> RECEIVER SETUP 1. Press . The main menu is displayed.
BLOWER SETUP MENU
2. Select the desired sub-menu with or .
3. Confirm the selection with .

ENTER
Fig. 5.7 Receiver SetUp menu selec-

tion
To select a specific parameter:

RECEIVER SETUP
FILL
> SETUP PARAMETER 1. Select the program parameter with or .
HARDWARE PARAMETER
2. Confirm the selection with .

ENTER
Fig. 5.8 Selecting sub-menu setup

parameter

5.2 Programming level
To change the program parameter value:

SETUP PARAMETER 1. Enter a new number for numeric values or select new entry with
<---
> FILL TIME 30s
FILL TIME 2 0s
or for pre-defined or text based parameters.
2. Confirm the entry with ENTER or discard with ESC .
Fig. 5.9 Selecting a parameter
ACCEPTED After the new value has been confirmed, the display will show for
about two seconds whether the new value has been accepted and will
then return to the sub-menu.
OUT OF RANGE
If the entry is not accepted an <Out of Range> message will appear.
Fig. 5.10 Entry messages

Starting system 6
Network polling at system power up 6.1
6 Starting system
6.1 Network polling at system power up

After powering up, the Series 4 MPC will poll for the connected receiv-
ers. Receivers that are registered during this polling process will be
displayed on the system status screen.
6.2 Program Setup

1. Upon power-up, the Series 4 MPC will post a CONFIG CHANGED
alarm if the receivers detected as being present on the system are
different than the receivers that are registered. Using the menu
tree, Fig. 7.1, navigate to screen S2 and perform a POLL
DEVICES.
2. Press and check to make sure all connected receiver

HOME
panels are listed. If not check and correct wiring and addressing
errors.
3. Using the menu tree, Fig. 7.1, and the BLOWER SETUP MENU,
in section 7.3, enter the appropriate settings for your particular
vacuum blower package on screens B1 through B8.
NOTE: Most systems will function well using the factory default
settings.
4. Use table below to determine the “TYPE” of receiver being
operated at each address.
Refer to section 7.2.2 for detailed information on each of the HARD-

WARE PARAMETER SCREENS. Refer to the menu tree, Fig. 7.1, to
see how to navigate the menu structure.
It is essential to determine and enter the “TYPE” for each receiver

in your system on screen HP1.
Receiver material level switch present
NO YES
Power dump NO Gravity-Time Gravity-Level

gate present
YES Power-Time Power-Level
Fig. 6.1 Selection receiver type

6 Starting system
6.3 Starting conveying process
5. Using the menu tree, Fig. 7.1, navigate to screen “R”. Enter the
address of the first receiver in your system. Navigate to
HARDWARE PARAMETERS and then to screen “HP1”. Select
the receiver “TYPE” determined in step 4 for this receiver.
Continue on to screens “HP2” through “HP6” if changes need to be
made to any of the default values. Note: the vast majority of
receivers need no change from default on screens HP2 through
HP5. Screen HP6 is important for receivers with power dump
gates.
Refer to section 7.2 for detailed information on each of the SETUP

PARAMETER SCREENS. Refer to the menu tree, Fig. 7.1, to see how
to navigate the menu structure.
6. Press ESC once and navigate to the SETUP PARAMETERS
screens. Make any needed changes from default values on

screens SP1 through SP10.
7. Return to screen “R” and repeat steps 4, 5 and 6 for all other
receiver addresses.
8. Turning receivers on: Navigate to screen “R2” for each receiver
you desire to be serviced when the system is turned on. Change
the state from Off to On for these receivers
9. Press to move to the status screen.

HOME
6.3 Starting conveying process
V Before starting the conveying cycle, make sure that no one is

working on system.
Press to start the system.

RUN
6.4 Stopping conveying process
Press to stop the system.

STOP

Programming reference 7
Menu structure 7.1
7 Programming reference
7.1 Menu structure
Fig. 7.1 Menu structure

7.2 Receiver setup menu

Screens R1 - R3 on menu structure Fig. 7.1
Parameter Screen# Definition Settings
SELECT R1 Selects the receiver to display and enter parameters: Range: 1 to 24

Default: 1
RECEIVER
MODE R2 Used to turn receiver on/off Range: ON /
OFF
Default: OFF
FILL R3 Used to initiate a fill cycle on a Power-Time type receiv- Range:

er. This may be desired if a receiver is showing full, but Default:
is actually empty due to a material source issue.
NOTES:
• This screen is visible for Power-Time receivers only.
• Upon power-up a Power-Time receiver will show full.
Since this type of receiver fills by time and holds
material until the dump gate opens the controller
assumes a full state upon power-up.
Initiating a fill cycle for a receiver that is holding material

can cause the receiver to overfill causing potential
damage to filter media. Line pluggage and blower high
vacuum may also occur.

Receiver setup menu 7.2
7.2.1 Setup parameter sub-menu

Screens SP1 - SP10 on menu structure Fig. 7.1.
FILLTIME SP1 Used to enter the amount of time the receiver will be Range: 0 to
under vacuum and drawing material. 999 sec.
Default:
NOTES: 30 sec.
• If a ratio valve is being used FILL TIME becomes the
time material 1 is conveyed.
• For Gravity-Level and Power-Level types of
receivers the fill time determines the FILL TIMEOUT
alarm threshold.
• Therefore set the fill time to a value greater than the
time needed for material to reach the level switch for
all Gravity-Level and Power Level receivers.
FILLTIME 2 SP2 Used to enter the amount of time the receiver will draw Range: 0 to
material 2. This parameter is used when a ratio valve is 999 sec.
employed allowing a second material to be drawn into Default: 0 sec.
the receiver following material 1 during the same fill cy-
cle.
NOTES:
• Ratio valves are purchaced separately.
• The receiver panel can support a ratio valve or a
purge valve, but not both.
• When a non-zero value is entered the PURGE
screen [SP8] is not accessable.
• This screen is not accessable when a non-zero
number is entered for the PURGE [SP8] parameter.
REPEAT CALL SP3 Used to enter the number of repeat calls that are nec- Range: 0 to 99
essary to register a "repeat call alarm". Default: 0
MAX
NOTES:
• A repeat call is defined as a call for material that is
received less than 20 seconds from the completion
of the previous dump cycle.
• The repeat call alarm can be used to notify the
operator of a problem at the material source.
• Entering a valve of zero disables the "Repeat Call
Alarm".
AFTERFILL SP4 Used to enter the number of pulse clean pulses that will Range: 0 to
occur after the fill cycle is complete. 250
PULSES Default: 0
Table page 1 of 3

PULSE MD SP5 Used to select the mode of the pulse clean cycle. Range:
Fill&Dump, Af-
NOTES: ter Fill, During-
• This screen is visible only for Power-Time and Fill, During-
Power-Level type receivers. Dump
Default: After
• When "After Fill" is selected the number of pulses Fill
programmed from screen [SP4] will occur after the fill
cycle is complete and before the dump gate is
allowed to open.
• When "During Fill" is selected the receiver will pulse
continuously during the fill cycle.
• When "During Dump" is selected the receiver will
pulse the number of pulses programmed from screen
[SP4] after the dump gate opens. The pulse cycle will
complete with the dump gate closed if the dump
cycle is short.
• When "Fill&Dump" is selected pulsing will occur
continuously during the fill cycle and dump cycle.
PULSE TIME SP6 Used to enter the on-time of a cleaning pulse. Range: 0 to
9900 msec.
Default:
300 msec.
PULSE SP7 Used to enter the off-time between cleaning pulses. Range: 0 to 25
sec.
INTERVAL Default: 3 sec.
PURGE TIME SP8 Used to enter the time a purge valve will be open in or- Range: 0 to
der to purge the line of material at the end of each fill 999 sec.
cycle. Default: 0 sec.
NOTES:
• Purge valves are purchaced separately.
• the receiver panel can support a ratio valve or a
purge valve, but not both.
• When a non-zero value is entered, the FILL TIME 2
screen [SP2] is not accessable.
• This screen is not accessable when a non-zero
number is entered for the FILL TIME 2 parameter
[SP2]
Table page 2 of 3

CALL TIME- SP9 Used to enter the time a receiver can be calling for ma- Range: 0 to
terial before a "CALL TIMEOUT" alarm is registered. 999 sec.
OUT Default: 0 sec.
NOTE:
• Entering a valve of zero disables the "CALL
TIMEOUT" alarm.
DUMP TIME SP10 Used to enter the maximum time of the dump cycle. Range:
0 to 50 sec.
NOTES:
Default: 6 sec.
• For a Gravity-Time or Gravity-Level receiver the
DUMP TIME begins after the pulse clean cycle is
completed. The dump time must expire before a call
for material can be established.
• For a Power-Time or Power-Level receiver the
DUMP TIME is the maximum time the dump gate will
be opened. The dump gate will close immediately
upon loosing the dump request input.
Table page 3 of 3

7.2.2 Hardware parameter sub-menu

Screens HP1 - HP6 on menu structure Fig. 7.1
TYPE HP1 Used to select receiver type Range:

Gravity-Time,
NOTES: Gravity-Level,
• Use Fig. 6.1 to determine the type of each receiver in Power-Time,
your system. Power-Level
Default:
• A Gravity-Time receiver has a gravity discharge gate Gravity-Time
that is opened by the weight of material when the
receiver is not under vacuum. It fills by time. If a level
switch is located in this type of receiver it will function
to detect an overfill condition. Therefore, the FILL
TIME, programmed from screen [SP1], must be a
value that stops the fill cycle before material reaches
the level switch.
• A Gravity-Level receiver has a gravity discharge gate
that is opened by the weight of material when the
receiver is not under vacuum. Material fills to the
level switch which ends the fill cycle. The fill time for
this type of receiver will trigger a fill time-out
condition. Therefore, the FILL TIME, programmed
from screen [SP1], must be a value greater than the
normal time it takes material to reach the level
switch.
• A Power-Time receiver has a power dump gate that
is opened when a dump request is received. The
gate will remain open until the dump request is lost
or the dump time expires. It fills by time. If a level
switch is located in this type of receiver it will function
to detect an overfill condition. Therefore, the FILL
TIME, programmed from screen [SP1], must be a
value that stops the fill cycle before material reaches
the level switch.
• A Power-Level receiver has a power dump gate that
is opened when a dump request is received. The
gate will remain open until the dump request is lost
or the dump time expires. Material fills to the level
switch which ends the fill cycle. The fill time for this
type of receiver will trigger a fill time-out condition.
Therefore, the FILL TIME, programmed from screen
[SP1], must be a value greater than the normal time
it takes material to reach the level switch.
Table page 1 of 2

CALL MODE HP2 Used to select the type of level sensor used for the call Range:
input. NPN NO,
PNP NC,
NOTE: NPN NC,
• Proximity sensors provided on standard K-Tron PNP NO
Premier receivers are PNP NO. Default:
PNP NO
CALL DELAY HP3 Used to enter the time the call input most be active be- Range: 0 to 25
fore being registered. sec.
Default: 1 sec.
PROX MODE HP4 Used to select the type of level sensor used for the re- Range:
ceiver material level. NPN NO,
PNP NC,
NOTE: NPN NC,
• Proximity sensors provided on standard K-Tron PNP NO
Premier receivers are PNP NO. Default:
PNP NO
PROX DELAY HP5 Used to enter the time the receiver prox input most be Range: 0 to
active before being registered 9900 msecs
Default:
1000 msec.
DUMP FB HP6 Used to enter the time allowed for the dump gate to Range: 0 to 9
transition from opened to closed after the dump gate sec.
DELAY Default: 4 sec.
output is dropped.
NOTES:
• Enter zero if no closed proof switch exist on the
dump gate.
• A "DUMP GATE FAIL" alarm will be triggered if time
expires before dump gate closed proof input goes
active.
SPARE HP7 Used to select the function of the receiver board spare Range:
output. DUMP,
OUTPUT FILL M1
NOTES: Default:
• When set to FILL M1 the spare output is energized DUMP
when material 1 is conveyed.
• When set to DUMP the spare output is energized
when the gate output is active
Table page 2 of 2

7.3 Blower setup menu
7.3 Blower setup menu

Screens B1 - B8 on menu structure Fig. 7.1
MODE B1 Used to select if the Main Blower or the Backup Blower Range:
is active when the system is in run mode. Main, Backup
Default: Main
NOTES:
• Valid when a backup blower is present and wired to
the Series 4 MPC.
• Switching the vacuum line from the main blower to

the backup needs to be completed before changing
this parameter.
OFF DELAY B2 Used to enter the time the blower will run with the vac- Range:
uum breaker opened when no receivers are calling. 0 to 6000 sec.
TIME Default:
20 sec.
SHUTD B3 Used to enter the maximum time the blower is allowed Range:
to run continuously. 0 to 9 hrs.
INTERVAL Default: 4 hrs.
NOTES:
• This parameter is used to force the blower to
shutdown momentarily to allow pulse cleaning of the
inline filter in a system with heavy use.
• When the programmed time expires the blower will
shutdown and the inline filter will go through its pulse
clean cycle. After the cycle is complete the blower
will reactivate.
• A zero value will deactivate the auto shutdown
function
NUMBER B4 Used to enter the number of pulse clean pulses that will Range:
occur after the blower shuts down. 0 to 250
PULSES Default: 3
CL PULSE B5 Used to enter the on-time of the inline filter cleaning Range: 0 to
pulse. 9900 msec.
TIME Default:
300 msec.
PULSE B6 Used to enter the off-time between the inline filter Range:
cleaning pulses. 0 to 25 sec
INTERVAL Default: 3 sec.
Table page 1 of 2

Blower setup menu 7.3
BREAKVLV B7 Used to select the operational mode of the vacuum Range: NOR,
breaker valve. INV
MODE Default: NOR
NOTES:
• With "Nor" selected the vacuum breaker valve will be
closed when the controller output is de-energized
and open when the output is energized.
• With "Inv" selected the vacuum breaker valve will be
open when the controller output is de-energized and
closed when the output is energized.
• The vacuum breaker valve must be closed for the
system to see vacuum.
FEEDBACK B8 Used to select the type of feedback coming from the Range: None,
vacuum blower motor starter. MS Aux, Alarm
Default:
NOTES: MS Aux
• Select "None" if no blower feedback will be used.
• Select "MS Aux" when the feedback in present when
the blower in active.
• Select "Alarm" when the feedback indicates a blower
alarm condition.
Table page 2 of 2

7.4 System parameter menu
7.4 System parameter menu

Screens S1 - S6 on menu structure Fig. 7.1
ACCESS S1 Used to select the security access level. Range:

Operator,
NOTES: Maintenance,
• The Series 4 MPC is shipped in the "Maintenance" Service
security level. The "Maintenance" level passcode Default:
when shipped is 0 (the digit zero). Maintenance
• The "Maintenance" security level allows access to all

parameter selection and numeric entry screens.
• "Operator“ security level can be selected with no
passcode requirement.
• The "Operator" security level limits access to
screens R, R1, R2, S and S1 only. These screens
allow access to turn receivers off/on and to passcode
entry only.
• Service level is passcode protected and is access
limited to trained K-Tron service personal.
POLL S2 Used to poll the network and register all connected re-
ceivers.
DEVICES
NOTES:
• Power down the Series 4 MPC before adding or
removing receiver panels from the network.
• When receiver panels are added to or removed from
the network a "Config Changed" alarm will be
activated upon power-up.
• When a "POLL DEVICES" is performed all
connected receiver panel are scanned and
registered.
• After receivers are registered the "Config Changed"
alarm will no longer appear at power-up.
Table page 1 of 2

System parameter menu 7.4
MAINTE- S3 This screen allows the user to change the "Mainte- Range: 0 to
nance" level passcode 99999999
NANCE Default: 0
NOTES:
PASSWD
• Begin by entering the current "Maintenance"
passcode.
• Upon correct passcode entry a screen will appear
prompting a new passcode.
• Passcodes are numeric and can be one to eight
digits long.
• After entering a new passcode the user will be
prompted to re-enter the new passcode
• If a user generated passcode is lost contact K-Tron
Premier at the number provided in this manual.
LANGUAGE S4 Used to select the language displayed on the operator Range:

interface English,
Deutsch,
Francais,
Espanol,
Italiano
Default:
English
HOST S5 Used to enter the address of the master controller when Range: 1 to 99
the Series 4 MPC is connected to a K-Vision or another Default: 1
ADDRESS host computer.
BAUD RATE S6 Used to select the communication speed between the Range: 9600,
K-Vision and the series 4 MPC. 19200, 38400,
57600
Default: 19200
SW # Software version of loaded software
HW # Hardware revision of CPU board installed
SN # Serial number
Table page 2 of 2

8 Transportation, Storage, Disposal
8.1 Notes on transportation
8 Transportation, Storage, Disposal
8.1 Notes on transportation

When transporting the Series 4 MPC off-site, use the saved packing
material provided in the original shipment and re-package the Series
4 MPC as received.
8.2 Notes on storage

To store the Series 4 MPC, secure unit in anti-static packing materials.
The storage location must be clean and dry and not exceed the rated
storage temperature limits as stated.
8.3 Notes on Disposal

If the Series 4 MPC is to be disposed, follow procedures for industrial
electronic disposal as required by law.

Maintenance 9
Preventive maintenance 9.1
9 Maintenance
V During operation and immediately after shut-down, the capacitors

and, therefore, the conducting parts of Series 4 MPC are under
high voltage. For this reason, before opening Series 4 MPC.
1. Disconnect Series 4 MPC from the power supply.
2. Wait at least 5 seconds before opening Series 4 MPC.

work on the Series 4 MPC.
V Always wear an anti-static wrist strap when working with sensitive
electronic assemblies to prevent static damage.
9.0.1 Required skills/training for maintenance of the Series 4

MPC
The service person must be skilled in power electronics and trained to
service the Series 4 MPC user interface.
9.0.2 General tools required

• Small flat blade screwdriver
• Phillips screwdriver, medium and small size
• Needle nose pliers
9.1 Preventive maintenance

Carry out the following preventive maintenance work after every
10,000 hours of operation or yearly:
m Check for damage and/or corrosion on the screwed connections,
particularly the AC line terminals.
m Check the security of all connections and cable glands.
m Check the operational readiness of all external safety switches or
interlocks.

10 Troubleshooting
10.1System alarm table
10 Troubleshooting
Trying to eliminate faults in a conveying equipment which is running

can cause serious accidents.
secure it against unintentional restarting.
1. Always switch off the conveying equipment before carrying out

repairs.
2. Check the conveying equipment.
connected control device or host computer (see operating
instructions for the relevant control device).
10.1 System alarm table
Alarm Description Cause Solution
EEPROM Setup parameters go back • Problem with CPU m Call factory.

FAILURE to default after power board eeprom chip has
cycle. been detected.
MAIN Main Blower input does not • With "MS Aux" selected m Correct screen [B8]
BLOWER FAIL match selected feedback on screen [B8]: Blower selection.
when blower is running. feedback input is not m Check wiring between
present when blower is motor starter and the
running. Series 4 MPC.
• With "Alarm" selected m Correct trip or alarm
on screen [B8]: Blower condition at motor
feedback input is starter.
present when blower is
running.
BACKUP Backup Blower input does • Same as above. m Same as above.
BLOWER FAIL not match selected
feedback when blower is
running.
Table page 1 of 2

Troubleshooting 10
Receiver alarm table 10.2
CONFIG The nodes present on the • One of more receiver m From screen
CHANGED network do not match the addresses have been [S2]:POLL DEVICES if
last registered changed. nodes have been
configuration. • One or more receiver added or removed or if
panels have been added addressing has been
or removed from the changed.
network. m Replace damaged or
• Communication cable missing
has been damaged or communication cable.
removed. m Replace failed receiver
• Receiver panel has panel.
failed.
Table page 2 of 2
10.2 Receiver alarm table
REPEAT CALL A repeat call occurs when • The receiver is unable to m Check the material
ALARM a call for material is supply material to the source and replentish if
established within 20 destination at a needed.
seconds of the end of the sufficient rate. m Increase the fill time, if
previous service cycle. A applicable.
REPEAT CALL ALARM
occurs when consecutive m Adjust the air intake at
repeat calls are registered. the source to maximize
The number of conveying rate.
consecutive repeat calls m Check for vacuum
needed to trigger a leaks at the receiver or
REPEATCALL ALARM is conveying line.
set on screen [SP3].
FILL A FILL TIMEOUT alarm • Material source issue. m Same as above.
TIMEOUT occurs when the fill time • FILL TIME parameter
expires before material from screen [SP1] is set
reaches the receiver level too low.
switch. This alarm is valid
for Power-Level and
Gravity-Level types only.
Table page 1 of 3

10 Troubleshooting
10.2Receiver alarm table
PROX FAIL Receiver level switch input • Level switch sensitivity m Adjust level switch
fails to drop-out during is too fine. sensitivity so input
material dump. • Material is collecting on drops during dumping.
the level switch or m Assure that material is
bridging in the receiver. discharging from
receiver.
m The DUMP TIME
parameter on screen
[SP10] is set too low.
CALL A receiver has been in the • The CALL TIMEOUT m Increase CALL
TIMEOUT call state for an extended parameter set on screen TIMEOUT parameter
period of time [SP9] is too low. set on screen [SP9].
compromising its ability to • FILL TIME parameters m Set CALL TIMEOUT
satisfy material rate from screen [SP1] for parameter to zero to
demand. other receivers on the disable this alarm.
network are set too high. m Correct material source
• The rate demand for the issues.
system is too high.
• Material source issues
exist for receivers that fill
by level causing these
receivers to have
extended fill times.
OVERFILL An OVERFILL alarm • The FILL TIME m Adjust the FILL TIME
occurs when material parameter from screen from screen [SP1].
reaches the receiver level [SP1] is set too high. m Change receiver TYPE
switch before the fill time • The source distance has parameter on screen
expires. This alarm is valid been changed causing [HP1] per Fig. 2.1.
for Power-Time and the material convey rate
Gravity Time receiver to increase.
types only.
• Receiver TYPE set on
screen [HP1] is
incorrect.
Table page 2 of 3

Troubleshooting 10
Receiver alarm table 10.2
DUMP GATE The dump gate open/ • The state of the dump m If a closed proof switch
FAIL closed position is not gate closed proof does exist, increase the
correct. not match the state of DUMP FB DELAY
the output command. parameter on screen
• A non-zero value exist in [HP6] to a value that is
the DUMP FB TIME greater than the gate
parameter on screen transition time.
[HP6] when a dump gate m If a closed proof switch
proof switch does not does not exist set the
exist. DUMP FB DELAY
parameter on screen
[HP6] to zero.
m Check the adjustment
of the dump gate
closed proof switch.
DEVICE A DEVICE FAILURE • A cable has been m If a receiver panel has
FAILURE indicates that disconnected or been intentionally
communication with a damaged. removed perform a
receiver panel has been • A receiver panel POLL DEVICES from
lost. address has been screen [S2].
changed. m Check trunk line cable
• A receiver board has connection at receiver
been damaged. panel.
m Replace damaged
trunk line cable.
m Replace damaged
receiver panel.
Table page 3 of 3

10 Troubleshooting
10.2Receiver alarm table

OPERATING AND
2400 Vacuum Blower

warnings.
Original operating instruction
0990034604-EN Rev. 1.0.0

Service

606 N. Front St. Fax 001 (0) 785 / 825 8759
Salina, KS 67402-0017
K-TRON (U.S.) Tel. 001 (0) 856 / 589 0500

Rt 55 and Rt 553 Fax 001 (0) 856 / 589 8113
Pitman, NJ 08071

Lenzhardweg 43/45 Fax 0041 (0) 62 / 885 7180
CH-5702 Niederlenz
Web: www.ktron.com
Before you call...

£ Do you have alarm displays? Can you eliminate their causes?
£ Have you modified part of the system, product or operating mode?
£ Have you tried to eliminate the fault in accordance with the operating
instructions?
£ Note down the project or job number. This can be found at the machine
• Example: 400545 or CO140717
Using the manual:

£ This arrow identifies an individual action.
step-by-step.
V This symbol identifies a general safety note
Datum: 2009/Dec/17 the express K-Tron disclaimer of warranties for a statement of the provisions limiting or disclaiming certain warranties
Table of Contents
1 Safety notes ......................................................................................................................... 5

1.1 Safety symbols definitions ..................................................................................................... 5
1.1.1 Electrical hazard icon ............................................................................................................ 6
1.1.2 Ground icon ........................................................................................................................... 6
1.1.3 Hands Entanglement Belt Drive icon ..................................................................................... 6
1.1.4 Power icon ............................................................................................................................. 6
1.1.5 Ear Protection Icon ................................................................................................................ 6
1.1.6 Hot Surface Icon .................................................................................................................... 6
1.1.7 Restricted Personnel Icon ..................................................................................................... 6
1.2 Responsibilities of the owner ................................................................................................. 7
1.3 Proper use ............................................................................................................................. 7
1.4 Organizational measures ....................................................................................................... 7
1.5 Safety-conscious work ........................................................................................................... 8
1.6 Safety devices ....................................................................................................................... 8
1.7 High voltage ........................................................................................................................... 8
1.8 Additional equipment ............................................................................................................. 9
1.9 Customer service and repairs ................................................................................................ 9
1.10 Shut-down procedure ............................................................................................................ 9
2 Application ......................................................................................................................... 10
2.1 Safety devices and warnings ............................................................................................... 11
2.1.1 Safety devices ..................................................................................................................... 11
2.1.2 Warnings ............................................................................................................................. 11
3 Technical data .................................................................................................................... 12
4 Installation .......................................................................................................................... 13
4.1 Transport ............................................................................................................................. 13
4.1.1 Transport ............................................................................................................................. 14
4.2 Unpacking ............................................................................................................................ 15
4.3 Blower and silencer mounting ............................................................................................. 15
4.4 Oil lubrication ....................................................................................................................... 16
4.5 Electrical connection ............................................................................................................ 17
4.5.1 Motor connection ................................................................................................................. 17
4.5.2 Pressure differential switch connection ............................................................................... 17
4.5.3 Temperature switch connection ........................................................................................... 17
4.5.4 Solenoid valve connection ................................................................................................... 17
4.6 Compressed air connections ............................................................................................... 18
4.7 Blower schematics ............................................................................................................... 18
4.7.1 Vacuum blower schematic ................................................................................................... 18
4.7.2 Vacuum breaker valve schematic
(Typical for style 1 vacuum, style 2 vacuum and

vacuum/pressure blowers) ................................................................................................... 19
5 Start-up ............................................................................................................................... 20
5.1 Start-up checklist ................................................................................................................. 20
5.2 Start-Up procedure .............................................................................................................. 21
5.3 Pressure differential switch .................................................................................................. 22
6 Operation ............................................................................................................................ 24
6.1 Notes on operation .............................................................................................................. 24
7 Cleaning .............................................................................................................................. 25
7.1 Switching off the installation ................................................................................................ 25
7.2 Cleaning ............................................................................................................................... 25
8 Maintenance ....................................................................................................................... 26
8.1 Maintenance intervals .......................................................................................................... 26
8.2 Blower bearing lubrication ................................................................................................... 27
8.3 Blower oil lubrication ............................................................................................................ 27
8.4 Motor bearing lubrication ..................................................................................................... 27
8.5 Belt adjustment .................................................................................................................... 27
8.6 Belt tension .......................................................................................................................... 28
9 Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................ 30
9.1 Troubleshooting table .......................................................................................................... 30

Safety notes 1
1 Safety notes






1 Safety notes

open the doors.
1.1.2 Ground icon
1.1.3 Hands Entanglement Belt Drive icon
1.1.4 Power icon
1.1.5 Ear Protection Icon
Ear protection must be worn.
1.1.6 Hot Surface Icon
Hot surface do not touch.
1.1.7 Restricted Personnel Icon
No access for unauthorized persons.

Safety notes 1
Responsibilities of the owner 1.2
blower.
V Establish personnel responsibilities for operation and mainte-
nance.
"Safety notes".
immediately.
V The plant owner is responsible for compliance with legally pre-
scribed accident prevention and safety regulations.
1.3 Proper use
V Only operate the blower in accordance with the specified technical

data.
V When processing dangerous materials, also comply with the safe-
ty notes which govern the handling of such materials.
V Any modifications and changes on safety devices are prohibited.
manufacturer.
V Eliminate ignition sources, avoid spills and continually clean the
working area.
V Always keep the operating instructions near the blower, within

easy reach. Ensure that they are always complete and legible.
V Observe the safety notes for the connected blower.
V In addition to the operating instructions, always comply with gen-
erally prescribed safety regulations governing accident prevention
and environmental safety.

1 Safety notes

V Ensure that only authorized personnel enter the working and dan-
ger area of the blower.
which affect safety must be reported immediately to the responsi-
ble member of the staff.
V Before opening or disassembling any part of the blower always
switch off the main power and air supply.
1.6 Safety devices
V Operating the blower without safety devices:

– is dangerous for the health and life of the operator or third per-
sons
– can damage the 2400 Vacuum blower or other material
V Only operate the blower if all safety devices are installed and fully
functional.
V Never open or remove covers or hoods while the blower is in op-
eration.
V Never operate the blower when the housing is open.
V Do not modify the electrical safety devices, for example fuses. In-
creased risk of accident.
1.7 High voltage

V Protect electrical parts of the blower against humidity.

Safety notes 1
Additional equipment 1.8
V Modifications to the blower are prohibited.

V The operator is responsible for complying with all safety regula-
tions related to incorporation with any additional equipment.
V Have repairs to the blower carried out by

– by the responsible K-Tron Premier customer service.
– or –
– by specialized personnel trained by K-Tron Premier.
Customer service address is found on the inside cover.
Only use original K-Tron Premier parts.

the blower from service.

2 Application
1.10Shut-down procedure
2 Application
Positive-Displacement Blowers are low pressure machines in which

successive volumes of gas are confined within an advancing closed
space between rotor and housing.The pressure is increased by com-
pressing gas in the discharge line with the blower lobe then back flow-
ing and mixing the discharge into blower pocket when it opens to the
discharge port.The feature unique to these machines is that they do
not compress the gas internally as do most other rotary compressors.
Fig. 2.1 2400 Vacuum Blower

Application 2
Safety devices and warnings 2.1
2.1 Safety devices and warnings
V Operate the blower only with the installed and operational safety
devices.
V Do not reach into the rotating parts.
2.1.1 Safety devices

• Drive belt guard (9)
1
2 2.1.2 Warnings
The following warnings are adhered to the 2400 Vacuum blower
3 4
• Relief Pinch Valve (1)
• Hot Surface (2)

56 7
9
8
• Ear Protection (3)
• Oil Warning (4)
• Restricted Personnel(5)
Fig. 2.2 Safety devices and warnings
• Lock Out (6)
• Belt Drive (7)
• Rotation (8)

3 Technical data
3 Technical data
Manufacturer Premier Pneumatics

Designation 2400 Vacuum Blower
Conformity
Protection class of electrical IP 65
components
Operating temperature range -10 to 65° C [14 to 150° F]
Noise level > 70 dB (A) Hearing protection is required

Installation 4
Transport 4.1
4 Installation
Ambient conditions
V Install the blower only in surroundings conforming to the technical
data (see section 3 Technical data and project manual).
V Only have the blower connected and commissioned by qualified

and authorized personnel.
4.1 Transport
V Only have the blower transported by authorized and qualified per-

sonnel.
V Transport the blower only with a hoisting equipment.
V In order to avoid damage to the blower only use lifting straps with
of the blower see section 3 Technical data and the mechanical
drawings).
to the band.

4 Installation
4.1 Transport
4.1.1 Transport
Wrap a lifting wrap around the
welded inlet T, insuring that the
sling does not rest on any plastic
tubing or wiring. Set down slowly
to avoid shifting or tipping. Max-
imum weight 680 Kg [1500 lbs.]
Fig. 4.1 Transport Pressure Blower

Installation 4
Unpacking 4.2
4.2 Unpacking
2. Remove the 2400 Vacuum blower carefully from the packaging
(see section 4.1 Transport).
for transport damage
4. Report any damage immediately to shipper and to Premier/
K-Tron.
4.3 Blower and silencer mounting
When carrying out maintenance or cleaning work on the switched-off

2400 Vacuum blower there is a danger of injury through unintentional
switching-on.
V Switch off the 2400 Vacuum blower before carrying out mainte-
nance work on the 2400 Vacuum blower and secure it against un-
intentional restarting.
V Do not use the blower as a means of support for a silencer. Unless

otherwise specified, support of silencers is to be furnished by the
installer.
1. Anchor the 2400 Vacuum blower and silencer (if floor mounted) to
a level, concrete surface. See the Fig. 4.2 dimension drawing fol-
lowing this manual for anchor bolt size and pattern.
2. If a vertical discharge silencer was anchored, connect the flexible
hose from the blower discharge to the silencer inlet (see Fig. 4.2)
and continue with step 4.
3. lnstall the horizontal discharge silencer to the 2400 Vacuum blow-
er with some means of support other than the blower (see Fig.
4.3). Do not remove the flexible connection between the 2400 Vac-
uum blower and the discharge silencer.
Fig. 4.2 Vertical silencer

4 Installation
4.4 Oil lubrication
4. lnstall the inlet silencer or inletlfilter silencer (if applicable) to the

2400 Vacuum blower with some means of support other than the
blower. Do not remove the flexible connection between the 2400
Vacuum blower and inlet silencer.
5. Tighten the clamps at all hose connections.
6. All blower packages are shipped with the gauge mounting bracket
bolted in the down position on the in backside of the drive guard to
prevent damage during shipment. Unscrew and remount the
gauge/mounting bracket on top, as shown in Fig. 4.3.
Fig. 4.3 Horizontal silencer
4.4 Oil lubrication
V Do not operate the blower before lubrication.
The 2400 Vacuum blower is shipped without oil in the blower gear
case. See the OEM blower information following this manual for the
proper oil selection and filling instructions. Do not operate the blower
before lubrication.
For additional informations see operating instructions for the OEM

blower.

Installation 4
Improper connection of the 2400 Vacuum blower can cause danger to

life through electric shock.
V The 2400 Vacuum blower may only be connected by qualified
electricians.
£ Connect the appropriate power supply to the drive motor, referenc-

ing the motor nameplate and wiring diagram. Ensure that the mo-
tor is properly grounded.

bonding (≤ 0.1 Ω).

from the 2400 Vacuum blower.

provided wiring diagrams and operating instructions.
4.5.1 Motor connection

Connect the appropriate power supply to the motor from the motor
starter, referencing the motor nameplate and wiring diagram in order
to ensure counterclockwise rotation. Ensure that the motor is properly
grounded.
4.5.2 Pressure differential switch connection

Make control connections to the pressure differential switch (located
in the panel box on the blower base). Refer to the electrical schematic
following this pre-printed manual.
4.5.3 Temperature switch connection

Make control connections to the temperature switch (wire connection
located in the panel box on the blower base). Refer to the electrical
schematic following this pre-printed manual.
VACUUM AND VACUUM BLOWERS ONLY
4.5.4 Solenoid valve connection

Make control connections to the solenoid valve (located on the panel
box on the blower base). Refer to the electrical schematic following
this pre-printed manual.

4 Installation
V Disconnect air supply when disassembling the 2400 Vacuum

blower.
<VACUUM AND VACUUM/PRESSURE BLOWERS ONLY>

1. Connect an air source of 80 to 100 PSI clean, dry, compressed air
to the "IN" port of the solenoid valve on the panel box.
4.7 Blower schematics
4.7.1 Vacuum blower schematic

(1) 1/4 “ O.D. Nylon tube
(2) 1/4 “ NPT Tee Hose fitting 1
(3) 1/4 “ NPT Hose fitting Pressure
gauge
(4) Connect temperature
switch wires to terminal 2
Blower
switch 4 and 5 inlet
(5) 1/4 “ NPT Hose fitting Blower 3
7 discharge
(6) 1/4 “ Snubber Panel
(7) 1/4 “ x 90° Elbow 6
5
Hi LO
4
Fig. 4.4 Pressure blower schematic

Installation 4
Blower schematics 4.7
4.7.2 Vacuum breaker valve schematic

(Typical for style 1 vacuum, style 2 vacuum and
vacuum/pressure blowers)
1/4 “ O.D
. Nylon tube
Vacuum
breaker
valve
In Plant-air
Solenoid valve
(Located on panelbox
on black power base)
Fig. 4.5 Pressure blower schematic

5 Start-up
5 Start-up
V Only operate 2400 Vacuum blower with all safety devices in place.

1. Ensure that the 2400 Vacuum blower and silencer, if floor mount-
ed, are anchored securely to a level, concrete surface.
2. Ensure that the 2400 Vacuum blower has adequate ventilation (ei-
ther natural or forced). The ambient temperature around the 2400
Vacuum blower should be less than the maximum, 40 degrees C.
(104 degrees F.).
3. Ensure that the blower gear case has been filled with oil according
to the OEM blower specifications manual.
Refer to the OEM blower manual for a blower Start-up Checklist.
4. Ensure tight hose connections at the inlet and outlet of the 2400
Vacuum blower.
5. Check for the proper wiring to the motor as specified on the motor
nameplate, ensuring counterclockwise shaft rotation. See 4.5
Electrical connection.
6. If your blower provides vacuum service, check for the proper wir-
ing and air connections to the vacuum breaker valve, as described
in 4.5.1 Motor connection.
7. Check for the proper wiring of the pressure differential switch, as
described in 4.5.2 Pressure differential switch connection.
8. Check for the proper wiring of the temperature switch, as de-
scribed in 4.5.3 Temperature switch connection.

Start-up 5
Start-Up procedure 5.2
5.2 Start-Up procedure
V Disconnect the power supply to the motor while performing steps

1 and 2.
1. With the power supply disconnected, remove the drive guard cov-
er, and verify that the sheaves are tight and properly aligned within
1/16". Ensure that the shafts are parallel to each other.
2. Check the belt tension to ensure a snug fit. Adjust if needed, as de-
scribed in 8.5 Belt adjustment. Rotate the blower by hand to en-
sure that the impeller does not knock or drag.
V Never operate the 2400 Vacuum blower with the drive guard cover
removed.
3. Reinstall the drive guard cover. Reconnect the power supply, as

described in 4.5.1 Motor connection, and ensure that the motor
ventilation is not restricted. Referencing the shaft behind the drive
guard and the rotation arrow on the drive guard, jog the motor to
ensure the correct direction of rotation.
4. Continue running the 2400 Vacuum blower for at least 10 minutes
with no load to ensure proper installation and operation. Do not
continue to operate the unit if the blower impeller knocks or drags.

5 Start-up
5.3 Pressure differential switch
5.3 Pressure differential switch

Premier blower assemblies utilize an overload protection switch (pres-
sure differential switch) for blower protection. This is factory Set for
applications up to 2500 feet above sea level. This setting is critical for
blower operation and protection. If the 2400 Vacuum blower is in-
stalled at an elevation above 2500 feet, the switch must be reset. On
system orders requesting initial start-up by a factory representative,
the switch will be reset by the representative. The switch may also be
returned to Premier for resetting at no charge, or it may be reset at the
job location as follows:
A. Ensure that the blower is off.
B. Disconnect the 1/4“ air hose from the „HI“ port on the pressure dif-
ferential switch. Connect a pressure gauge regulator with a squeeze
type bulb to the „HI“ port, as shown in Fig. 5.1. A regulated, com-
pressed air supply, gauge, and bleed valve can be used as an alter-
nate to the test apparatus described.
Pressure Blower Vacuum Blower

Blower installation elevation max. operating P.D switch max. operating P.D switch
(Feet above sea level) pressure setpoint (PSID) pressure setpoint (PSID)
(PSIG) (PSIG)
0 to 2500 (Factory standard) 12.0 13.6 12.0 6.9
2501 to 3000 11.0 12.9 11.5 6.7
3001 to 4000 10.5 12.4 11.0 6.5
4001 to 5000 10.0 11.9 10.5 6.3
5001 to 6000 9.5 11.5 10.0 6.0
(1) 3/16 “ Allen wrench

(2) Adjustment screw 2
(To increase the differential 1
pressure switch setpoint,
turn the adjustment screw
counter-clockwise)
(3) Pressure differential switch
(Located in the panel box 3
which is mounted on the
4
blower base)
(4) Bleed-Off-Valve 5
(5) Pressure gauge with
squeeze type bulb
Fig. 5.1 Pressure differential switch

Start-up 5
Pressure differential switch 5.3
If your blower performs both vacuum and pressure service, consult

Premier for the desired switch setting in the following step
C. Close the bleed-off valve on the pressure gauge and pump up with
air until the desired switch setting (as determined from the chart in Fig.
5.1) is read on the gauge. Listen for an audible click as the pressure
rises. Ensure there are no air leaks.
• If the switch did not click before the desired pressure setting was
reached, slowly turn the pressure differential switch adjusting screw
clockwise, using a 3/16“ allen wrench as shown in Fig. 5.1, until the
switch clicks. This is the setpoint.
• If the switch clicked before the desired pressure setting was
reached, relieve all pressure by opening the bleed-off valve. Using
a 3/16“ allen wrench, turn the pressure differential switch adjusting
screw counterclockwise, as shown in Fig. 5.1, until it is flush with the
switch housing. Close the bleed-off valve on the pressure gauge,
and pump back up to the desired switch setting. Slowly turn the
switch adjusting screw clockwise until a click is heard. This is the
Set point.
D. Once the desired switch setting has been reached, check it again
using the above procedure to ensure that it is correct. If so, remove
the test equipment, and reconnect the 1/4" hose to the original posi-
tion.
V Do not tamper with the settings, as serious damage to equipment

could result.
.A high temperature sensing thermostat is located at the blower dis-

charge. This is factory set to close on rise at 345 degrees F.
Pressure service blowers are equipped with a pressure relief valve on
the discharge side of the blower. This is factory set at 15 PSIG.
Vacuum service blowers are equipped with an electrically-actuated
vacuum breaker valve. It should be Open only when the blower is run-
ning, but the system is not conveying material. Once the system is in
operation, check to ensure that this valve does not Open during a ma-
terial conveying cycle.

6 Operation
6 Operation

Cleaning 7
Switching off the installation 7.1
7 Cleaning
When carrying out maintenance work on the switched-off 2400 Vacu-

um blower there is a danger of injury through unintentional switching-
on.
V Switch off the system before carrying out maintenance work on the
conveying device and secure it against unintentional restarting
(see chapter 7.1).

out procedure.
4. Turn off compressed air.
7.2 Cleaning
Aggressive and toxic cleaning agents damage the 2400 Vacuum

blower and represent an increased accident risk.
V Do not clean the 2400 Vacuum blower with corrosive cleaning
agents.
V Use only safe cleaning agents and disinfectants in 2400 Vacuum
blower used for foods.
V Do not clean the 2400 Vacuum blower with high-pressure devices.

8 Maintenance
8 Maintenance
When carrying out maintenance work on the switched-off 2400 Vacu-

um blower there is a danger of injury through unintentional switching-
on.
V Switch off the 2400 Vacuum blower before carrying out mainte-
nance work on the equipment and secure it against unintentional
restarting (see section 7.1 Switching off the installation).

work on the 2400 Vacuum blower.

Mechanics £ Eliminate dust accumulation more £ As required

than 5 mm [0.2 in] through clean-
ing.
£ Check 2400 Vacuum blower me-
chanical connections for tightness.
£ Check safety symbols at the equip-
ment for legibility and
completeness.
£ Check pressure regulator. £ Annually
£ Change filters. £ As required
Electric £ Check ground wires and static £ As required
bonding.
£ Check all electrical connections.

Maintenance 8
Blower bearing lubrication 8.2
8.2 Blower bearing lubrication

See the OEM blower information for the proper grease selection and
lubricating instructions.
£ See the OEM blower information following this manual for the
proper grease selection and application instructions.
8.3 Blower oil lubrication

See the OEM blower information following this manual for the proper
oil selection and filling instructions.
8.4 Motor bearing lubrication

Grease the motor bearings every 2 to 5 years for normal to light duty
service and every 4 months to 2 years for heavy duty service. Unless
a special grease is specified on the nameplate, use one of the follow-
ing greases or an equivalent:
Standard Oil Co. of Calif., Inc., SR1 #2

Texaco, Inc., Premium RB #2
Shell Casida GL 150
Stop the motor, and remove the drain plug. Using a low-pressure
grease gun, apply the grease to the zerk located beside the motor
shaft while the motor is still warm. Run the motor for several minutes
to discharge the excess grease, and then replace the drain plug.
8.5 Belt adjustment

With the power disconnected from the motor, check the belt tension
after the first several hours of operation, and adjust, if needed, to ob-
tain a snug fit. Tighten according to the instructions in 8.6 Belt tension.
If unfamiliar with the procedure for tightening V-belts, contact the fac-
tory.
Using a straight edge, ensure that the sheaves are tight and properly
aligned within 1/16" plane.
Ensure that the shafts are parallel.
Reinstall the drive guard Cover.

8 Maintenance
8.6 Belt tension
8.6 Belt tension

1. Divide the size of the larger sheave by the size of the smaller
sheave to determine the drive speed ratio.
2. Measure the belt span (where the belt first contacts the motor
sheave to where the belt first contacts the blower sheave).
3. Using following table A, determine the amount of deflection force
required using: the belt size. closest sheave size listed, and clos-
est drive speed ratio listed. For new belts, use approximately
130% of the values listed. Multiply the number of bands in the belt
by the deflection force to find the total deflection force required.
4. Using o V-Belt Tension Tester. place the large 0-ring on the tester
to the span length that was determined in step 2. Place the small
0-ring flush with the barrel of the tester.
5. Place a straight edge spanning from the top edge of the motor
sheave to the top edge of the blower sheave.
6. Place the tension tester on top of the belt in the center of the span
and deflect until the large 0-ring is flush with the straight edge.
7. Read where the small 0-ring is Iocated to determine what the de-
flection force is.
8. If the force is below the recommended value. increase the center
distance until desired force is achieved. If the force is above the
recommended value, reduce the center distance until the desired
force is achieved.
9. Avoid excessive over tension, and never roll the belts On, as this
will cause damage to the belts.

Maintenance 8
Belt tension 8.6
• Use approximately 130% of above values to tension a new set of

belts.
• Use closest sheave dia. for sizes not shown.
Small Sheave Deflection Force in lbs.for

V-Belt Speed Drive Speed Ratio of:
Section Range Dia. 1.0 1.5 2.0
3VX 1200-3600 2.2 2.2 2.5 2.7
1200-3600 2.5 2.6 2.9 3.1
1200-3600 3.0 3.1 3.5 3.7
1200-3600 4.1 3.9 4.3 4.5
1200-3600 5.3 4.6 4.9 5.1
1200-3600 6.9 5.0 5.4 5.6
5VX 1200-3600 4.4 6.5 7.5 8.0
1200-3600 5.2 8.0 9.0 9.5
1200-3600 6.3 9.5 10.0 11.0
1200-3600 7.1 10.0 11.0 12.0

9 Troubleshooting
9 Troubleshooting
Eliminating faults in a 2400 Vacuum blower which is running can

V Switch off the 2400 Vacuum blower before every intervention and
secure it against unintentional restarting (see chapter 7.1 Switch-
ing off the installation).
1. Always switch off the 2400 Vacuum blower before carrying out re-
pairs.
2. Check the 2400 Vacuum blower (see chapter 9.1 Troubleshooting
table).
For blower malfunction see the OEM blower information following this
manual for blower troubleshooting.
Error Cause Remedy
Motor will not start. • No power source £ Check the power source for suffi-
cient power as specified on the
nameplate. Check the wiring con-
nections and the motor protection
devices; e.g., fuses, circuit break-
ers, and overload elements. Re-
place the fuses, if blown, and reset
the circuit breakers or overload ele-
ments, if tripped.
£ The motor may be burned out. If so,
• Motor defect it will need to be repaired or re-
placed.
High motor tempera- • Wrong electrical overload elements £ Verify that the electrical overload
ture elements are properly sized per the
full load amp specification on the
Motors operating un- motor nameplate. Oversized ele-
der rated load (amp ments will not protect the motor
draw) and ambient from overload.
conditions, as speci- • Motor ventilation £ Check for proper ventilation around
fied on the name- the motor. Material or dust buildup
plate, may feel warm on the exterior of the motor may
when touched. hamper ventilation.

Troubleshooting 9
Troubleshooting table 9.1
Error Cause Remedy
High differential • Conveying line £ Check the conveying line for plug-
pressure ging. Clear the plug.
• Adjustable probe £ If your system is being fed with an

adjustable probe, adjust for a less-
er flow rate.
Note: The system may be restarted to determine if the high differential pressure condition still exists. If
it does, correct the cause before restarting the system again.
High temperature • Filters £ Check for clogged filters, e.g. in-
line filter, filter element on inletlfilter
The 2400 Vacuum silencer. Clean or replace the fil-
blower will shut ters.
down on a high blow- • Conveying line £ Check the conveying line for plug-
er discharge temper- ging. Clear the plug.
ature condition. This
is usually caused by
inadequate air flow
through the blower.
Note: Do not restart the system until the cause of high temperature condition is corrected.

9 Troubleshooting
Error Cause Remedy
Air loss • Leaks in system £ Ensure that there are no leaks in

the system components, e.g. holes
in the filter bags on receivers or in-
line filters. See the TROUBLE-
SHOOTING section in the individu-
al component manuals.
£ Check for air leaks in the system
conveying line and hose.
• Material inlet probe £ Ensure proper adjustment of the air
flow control at the material inlet
probe, if applicable.
• Vacuum breaker valve £ If the blower is in vacuum service,
ensure that the vacuum breaker
valve is correctly wired. Check for
the proper operation of the air cylin-
der on the vacuum breaker valve
and solenoid (on the control box on
the side of the blower base). This
will ensure that the vacuum break-
er valve isn't open during the con-
veying cycle.
• V-Belts £ Check the drive V-belts for proper
tensioning to ensure that they don't
slip.
Note: See blower troubleshooting in the OEM blower information following this manual.

OPERATING AND
Vacuum Sequence Valve

warnings.
0990034603-EN Rev. 1.1.0

Service

606 N. Front St. Fax 001 (0) 785 / 825 8759
Salina, KS 67402-0017
K-TRON (U.S.) Tel. 001 (0) 856 / 589 0500

Rt 55 and Rt 553 Fax 001 (0) 856 / 589 8113
Pitman, NJ 08071

Lenzhardweg 43/45 Fax 0041 (0) 62 / 885 7180
CH-5702 Niederlenz
Web: www.ktron.com
Before you call...

« Do you have alarm displays? Can you eliminate their causes?
« Have you modified part of the system, product or operating mode?
« Have you tried to eliminate the fault in accordance with the operating
instructions?
« Note down the project or job number. This can be found at the machine
• Example: 400545 or CO140717
Using the manual:

« This arrow identifies an individual action.
step-by-step.
Datum: 2009/Sep/22 the express K-Tron disclaimer of warranties for a statement of the provisions limiting or disclaiming certain warranties
Table of Contents
1 Safety notes ............................................................. 5

1.1.2 Ground icon ............................................................... 6
1.1.3 No hands icon ........................................................... 6
1.1.4 Power icon ................................................................ 6
1.3 Proper use ................................................................. 7
1.6 Safety devices ........................................................... 8
1.7 High voltage .............................................................. 8
1.10 Shut-down procedure ................................................ 9
2 Application ............................................................. 10
2.1 Typical installation ................................................... 10
3 Technical data ....................................................... 11
4 Installation ............................................................. 12
4.1 Transport ................................................................. 12
4.2 Unpacking ............................................................... 12
4.3 Valve mounting ....................................................... 13
4.4 Hose assembly ........................................................ 14
5 Cleaning ................................................................. 15
5.2 Cleaning .................................................................. 15
6 Maintenance .......................................................... 16
6.2 Seal disk replacement ............................................. 17
6.3 Replacing or cleaning exhaust filters ...................... 17
8 Explosion-proof valve ........................................... 20

8.1 Safety notes ............................................................ 20
8.1.1 General ................................................................... 20

8.1.2 Operation of the device in accordance with ATEX .. 20
8.1.3 Standards and directives ......................................... 20
8.2 Area of use in an explosive atmosphere ................. 21
8.2.1 Explosion proof marking .......................................... 21
8.2.2 Zones and device categories (gas) ......................... 21
8.2.3 Zones and device categories (dust) ........................ 21
8.3 Dust deposits and glow temperature ....................... 22
8.4 Device categories within and outside the receiver .. 22
8.5 Ingress Protection IP through housing .................... 23
9 Appendix ................................................................ 24
9.1 Declaration of conformity ........................................ 24

Safety notes 1
1 Safety notes

In case of equipment which are used in hazardous areas also observe

the safety notes and information for explosion-proof equipment
(see Section 8).




Important information to explosion protection.

1 Safety notes

open the doors.
1.1.2 Ground icon
1.1.3 No hands icon
1.1.4 Power icon

Safety notes 1
Responsibilities of the owner 1.2
V Ensure that only qualified and trained personnel work with the con-
veying devices.
V Establish personnel responsibilities for operation and mainte-
nance.
"Safety notes".
immediately.
V The plant owner is responsible for compliance with legally pre-
scribed accident prevention and safety regulations.
1.3 Proper use
V Only operate the valve in conjunction with a suitable controller.

V When processing dangerous materials, also comply with the safe-
ty notes which govern the handling of such materials.
V Never use a conveying device to process materials which may
cause a chemical reaction with the materials of the conveying de-
vice.
V Only operate the valve in accordance with the specified technical
data. Any modifications aimed at increasing the performance of
the conveying equipment are prohibited.
V Comply with the respective operating instructions and observe the
conditions for maintenance.
V Never use a conveying device to process explosive gas or air gas
mix. Danger of explosion!
V Max ignition energy of the conveyed product may not exceed
10mJ at room temperature.
V Always keep the operating instructions near the valve, within easy
reach. Ensure that they are always complete and legible.
V Observe the safety notes for the connected control devices.
V In addition to the operating instructions, always comply with gen-
erally prescribed safety regulations governing accident prevention
and environmental safety.

1 Safety notes
V This includes reading the operating instructions, particularly this

chapter “Safety Notes” and compliance with these instructions.
V Ensure that only authorized personnel enter the working and dan-
ger area of the device.
V Any changes (including changes to operational behavior) which
affect safety must be immediately reported to the responsible
member of staff .
V Perform all operations with safety in mind.
V Disconnect the valve before making any adjustments.
1.6 Safety devices
V Operating the valve without safety devices or with defective safety

devices constitutes a danger to life and limb for the operator or a
third party of damaging the valve or other property.
system for the safety devices. Increased risk of accidents.
V Only operate the conveying equipment if all safety devices are in-
stalled and fully functional.
V Never operate the valve with the housing disconnected from the
piping. Replace damaged cables and connections immediately.
1.7 High voltage
V Only qualified electricians may work on the electrical equipment of

the conveying devices.
V Protect the electrical components of the device against moisture.
V Modifications to the valve are prohibited.

V The operator is responsible for complying with all safety regula-
tions related to interoperation with any additional equipment, e.g.
feeding equipment.

Safety notes 1
Customer service and repairs 1.9

– the responsible K-Tron Process Group customer service.
– or –
– specialized personnel trained by K-Tron Premier.
Only use original K-Tron Premier parts.


2 Application
2.1 Typical installation
2 Application
The Vacuum Sequence Valve is used to place the vacuum receiver

under vacuum during the conveying of material (solenoid coil ener-
gized, cylinder retracted) by porting to the vacuum line. Likewise it will
vent the vacuum receiver to atmosphere (solenoid coil de-energized,
cylinder extended), thus breaking the vacuum pressure during start-
up, discharge and idling periods.
2.1 Typical installation

(1) Vacuum connection
(2) Sequencing valve 1
(3) Ferrule clamp
2
(4) Vacuum receiver
3
Fig. 2.1 Typical installation

Technical data 3
Typical installation 2.1
3 Technical data
In case of equipment used in hazardous areas, also observe the safe-

ty notes and information for explosion-proof equipment
(see Section 8).

Designation Vacuum sequencing valve
Conformity
II (for detailed marking see declaration of conformity)
Protection class of electrical IP 65 [Nema 4] (Solenoid valve)

components
Maximum air pressure 6.8 bar [100 PSI]
Noise level < 70 dB (A)
Weight 11 [5 lb.]
Dimensions See dimensional drawing in the systems project manual
Materials of constructions:
Valve casting Aluminium 319F
Seals Food quality urethane, clear

Operating temperature range -10 to 50°C [14 to 122°F]

4 Installation
4.1 Transport
4 Installation
V Only have the conveying equipment connected and commis-

sioned by authorized personnel.
4.1 Transport
Weight of valve is less than 11 kg [5 lbs].
V Do not lift valve by the cylinder.
4.2 Unpacking
1. Remove the valve carefully from the packaging.
for transport damage.

Installation 4
Valve mounting 4.3
4.3 Valve mounting
• The compressed air supply must be clean, dry and oil free.
• Maximum 6.8 bar [100 PSI] from the main supply.
• Both ends of the valve are to be fully connected to the vacuum pip-
ing before any electrical connections are attached.
• Ensure ferrule connection is securely attached to the fitting on the
top of the vacuum receiver.
• Connect a source of 5.5 to 6.9 bar [80 to 100 PSI] of clean, dry,
compressed air to solenoid valve.
• Follow diagram to connect electrical wiring and compressed air.
(1) 24 DC Signal from control
panel 1 2
(2) Ground
(3) Clean, dry and oil free 3
Compressed air
5.5 - 6.8 Bar [80 - 100 Psi]
Fig. 4.1 Connection diagram

4 Installation
4.4 Hose assembly
4.4 Hose assembly

The entire conveying line and the receivers should be grounded. All
hose sections should have a copper ground wire molded in the hose.
The copper wire should be grounded at each end, preferably using
hose clamps, as shown.
equipment
2. Hose clamp
1 3 4 5
grounding wire 2
fitting) or convey line
Fig. 4.2 Hose assembly

wire:
inside of the hose.
fitting.

Cleaning 5
Switching off the installation 5.1
5 Cleaning

on.
V Switch off the conveying equipment before carrying out mainte-
restarting (see section 5.1).

out procedure.
5.2 Cleaning
Aggressive and toxic cleaning agents damage the valve and repre-
sent an increased accident risk.
V Do not clean the valve with corrosive cleaning agents.
V Use only safe cleaning agents and disinfectants in valve used for
foods.
V Do not clean the valve with high-pressure devices.

6 Maintenance
6 Maintenance

on.
V Switch off the conveying equipment before carrying out mainte-
restarting (see section 5.1).

The Vacuum Sequencing Valves require limited maintenance. If it is

detected that air is escaping from the valve it is probable that the seal
disc has failed and requires replacing spare part.

Mechanics « Check compressed air « As required

« Empty water-separator
« Check convey and vacuum line
mechanical connections for tight-
ness.
« Check seal disk for damage.
« Check pressure regulator « Annually
Electric « Check all electrical connections « As required

Maintenance 6
Seal disk replacement 6.2
6.2 Seal disk replacement

(1) Replaceable seal
(2) Nylock nut
(3) Tool flats
1
2
Fig. 6.1 Seal replacement
1. Make sure that the supply of compressed air is turned off. Discon-
nect the air line from the solenoid.
2. Remove complete valve from the vacuum line by disconnecting
pipe work and flexible hoses and note to which each part was at-
tached.
3. Undo the nylon nut from the piston rod, remove the large stainless
retaining washer and pull off the defective valve disc.
Any deep marks/cracks will mean the valve seal/disc needs to be re-
placed. Also ensure nylon nut is also replaced.
4. Replace valve disc.

5. Tighten the nylon nut and replace body.
6. Assembly is the reverse of disassembly.
6.3 Replacing or cleaning exhaust filters

If filters are past their useful life, they need to be replaced. Replace-
ment filters can be ordered from the factory.
1. Remove each filter with a flat head screw driver, turning counter
clockwise.
2. Once removed, filter can either be washed clean or blown clean
with compressed air.

7 Troubleshooting
6.3 Replacing or cleaning exhaust filters
7 Troubleshooting
Eliminating faults in active conveying equipment can cause serious

accidents.
1. Always switch off the conveying equipment before carrying out re-
pairs.
connected control device or host computer (see operating instruc-
tions for the relevant control device).

Troubleshooting 7
Troubleshooting table 7.1
Error Cause Remedy
Vacuum sequence • Sensor discharge gate is not work- « Ensure that the discharge gate is
valve will not operate ing hanging in its closed position.
When the gate is in this position,
the LED light on the proximity sen-
sor should be illuminated, indicat-
ing that the receiver is calling for
service.
« If the LED is not illuminated when
the gate is in its closed position, ad-
just the proximity probe depth until
the LED illuminates. When the gate
is in its closed position, there
should be 1.6 mm [.063 in] gap be-
tween the sensing tab and the
proximity switch.
• Solenoid valve not energized « Check for the correct voltage (24
volts DC) to the solenoid valve from
the control panel during the fill cy-
cle (see wiring schematics).
• Solenoid valve burned out « The coil may be burned out. A re-
placement solenoid valve is avail-
able as a spare part.
• Dirt in the solenoid valve « Remove the valve core, and clean
out any dirt, scale, or rust with com-
pressed air. If the valve core is
damaged or worn, replace it.
• Not enough air « Check for the proper air supply of
5.5 to 6.9 bar [80 to 100 PSI] of
clean, dry, compressed air to the
solenoid valve. Also, check the air
connections.
• Air cylinder damaged « Check for the correct operation of
the air cylinder. A replacement air
cylinder is available as a spare
part.

8 Explosion-proof valve
8.1 Safety notes
8.1 Safety notes
8.1.1 General
The explosion-proof valve conforms to the design regulations for the
device group II.
V The explosion-proof valve may only be used in those zones which
are specified in the declaration of conformity or in non-classified
areas.
V For the maximum surface temperature of the device see the dec-
laration of conformity.
V The plant owner has to ensure that a possible dust layer is not
thicker than a maximum of 5 mm (conforming to EN).
V The valve may only be used in the ambient temperature range
specified in the declaration of conformity.
V The plant owner has to ensure that the information on the rating
plate of the individual drives have to agree with the conditions in
the area of use on site.
V The plant owner has to ensure that the power supply agrees with
the information on the rating plate of the individual drives.
8.1.2 Operation of the device in accordance with ATEX

V The valve belongs to device group II. For the device category see
marking on the valve or declaration of conformity.
8.1.3 Standards and directives

V Observe and fulfill the following instructions, standards and direc-
tives when installing and erecting explosion-proof systems:

Explosion-proof valve 8
Area of use in an explosive atmosphere 8.2
8.2 Area of use in an explosive atmosphere
V The owner is responsible for ensuring that the system is installed

in the intended zone. The corresponding category is described in
the declaration of conformity.
8.2.1 Explosion proof marking

The marking on the valve shows the device category.The declaration
of conformity shows the zone in which the valve may be used.
The interrelation between the device categories/explosion groups and
zones is shown in the tables in Sections 8.2.2 and 8.2.3.
8.2.2 Zones and device categories (gas)

Zone Description Devices of
Definition:
the catego-
"Explosive atmosphere " ry
Mixture of air and flammable gases,
vapors, mists or dusts under Zone 0 Areas in which it is expected that danger- 1G
atmospheric conditions in which the ous, potentially explosive atmospheres
combustion process is transferred to
the complete non-burned mixture after are present continuously for an extended
ignition has occurred. period or occur frequently.
Zone 1 Areas in which it is to be expected that 2G
dangerous, potentially explosive atmo-
spheres arise occasionally.
Zone 2 Areas in which it is not expected that dan- 3G
gerous, potentially explosive atmo-
spheres arise. If they do arise here, how-
ever, it is only seldom and briefly.
8.2.3 Zones and device categories (dust)

Zone Description Devices of
the catego-
ry
Zone 20 Areas in which it is expected that danger- 1D

ous, potentially explosive air/dust atmo-
spheres are present continuously for an
extended period or occur frequently.
Zone 21 Areas in which it is to be expected that 2D
dangerous, potentially explosive air/dust
atmospheres arise occasionally.
Zone 22 Areas in which it is not to be expected that 3D
dangerous, potentially explosive air/dust
atmospheres arise. If they do arise here,
however, it is only seldom and briefly.

8.3 Dust deposits and glow temperature
8.3 Dust deposits and glow temperature
V Observe the requirements of the standard EN with regard to re-

duced glow temperature at dust deposits.
In case of dust deposits of up to 5 mm:

• Tmax + 75 K ≤ T5 mm
• T5 mm is the ignition temperature of a dust layer of 5 mm.
• Tmax is the max. surface temperature of the device.
In case of dust deposits greater than 5 mm:

• The difference to be observed between the glow temperature of the
material and the surface temperature (Tmax) depends on how thick
the dust layer is. The context is shown in Fig. 1 of the standard).
8.4 Device categories within and outside the re-

ceiver
Leaky connections can lead to dangerous explosive atmospheres.

V Ensure that seals and gasketed connections are undamaged,
clean and built in correctly.
V Always work carefully during mounting and maintenance.
V Replace defective parts immediately.
The areas within a receiver (1) often have a different zone/device cat-
egory assigned to them as the area outside the receiver (2).
1
2
Fig. 8.1 Device categories

inside/outside

Explosion-proof valve 8
Ingress Protection IP through housing 8.5
8.5 Ingress Protection IP through housing

Moving parts, such as valve seal, cylinder, etc. are protected by a
housing having the degree of protection according to declaration of
conformity.
The degree of protection of the housing according to declaration of

conformity has to remain.
V Ensure that the seals always conform to the degree of protection
according to declaration of conformity.
V Ensure that the vent filters are clean.
V Always work carefully during mounting and maintenance.
V Replace defective parts immediately.

9 Appendix
9.1 Declaration of conformity
9 Appendix
9.1 Declaration of conformity
Premier Pneumatics, Inc.

606 North Front Street
PO Box 17
Salina, KS 67402-0017
Tel (785) 825-1611
Declaration of conformity
We declare that the following equipment: Technical File No.: 3532000700
Model Number.: Type: Marking:

4127-288 Vacuum Sequencing Valve II 3 D c T5
-10°C < Tamb. < 50°C
are in conformance with the relevant directives inclusive their amendments and the following
standards:
Directive Standards
2006/42/EC: Machinery directive EN ISO 12100-1:2003 ; EN ISO 12100-2:2003
EN 294:1992
94/9/EC: Equipment and protective systems EN 61241-0 : 2006
intended for use in potentially explosive EN 61241-1 : 2004
atmospheres EN 60079-0 : 2006
EN 13463-1: 2007
EN 13463-5: 2003
EN 1127-1: 2007
97/23/EEC: Pressure Equipment Directive EN 741
Commissioning of the device is prohibited until it is determined that the machine/plant, into which it will be
incorporated, complies with the EC directive for machinery, all other relevant EC directives, harmonized
standards and applicable national standards.
Modifications, alterations, or additions to this device, if performed by any person other than the above
mentioned manufacturer or an authorized representative, will nullify this Declaration.
Engineering General Manager

Patrick E. Mahoney Todd W. Smith
Place / Date: Salina, Kansas, USA / 27.March.2009
Document No. 3532000700-0000 Page: 1 / 1

OPERATING AND
2424 Receiver

warnings.
0890034606-EN Rev. 1.0.0

Service

606 N. Front St. Fax 001 (0) 785 / 825 8759
Salina, KS 67402-0017
K-TRON (U.S.) Tel. 001 (0) 856 / 589 0500

Rt 55 and Rt 553 Fax 001 (0) 856 / 589 8113
Pitman, NJ 08071

Industrie Lenzhard Fax 0041 (0) 62 / 885 7180
CH-5702 Niederlenz
Web: www.premierpneumatics.com
www.ktron.com
Before you call...

« Do you have alarm displays? Can you eliminate their causes?
« Have you modified part of the system, product or operating mode?
« Have you tried to eliminate the fault in accordance with the operating
instructions?
« Note down the project or job number. This can be found at the machine
or in the project manual. - Example: 400545
Using the manual:

« This arrow identifies an individual action.
step-by-step.
Datum: 2008/Sep/04 the express K-Tron disclaimer of warranties for a statement of the provisions limiting or disclaiming certain warranties
Table of Contents
1 Safety notes ............................................................. 5

1.1.2 Ground icon ............................................................... 6
1.1.3 No hands icon ........................................................... 6
1.1.4 Power icon ................................................................ 6
1.3 Proper use ................................................................. 7
1.6 Safety devices ........................................................... 9
1.7 High voltage .............................................................. 9
1.10 Shut-down procedure .............................................. 10
2 Application ............................................................. 11
2.1 Function .................................................................. 11
2.2 2424 Powder Receiver components ....................... 12
2.3 2424 Pellet Receiver components .......................... 13
2.4 Safety devices and warnings .................................. 14
2.4.1 Safety devices ......................................................... 14
2.4.2 Warnings ................................................................. 15
3 Technical data ....................................................... 16
4 Installation ............................................................. 17
4.1 Transport ................................................................. 17
4.2 Unpacking ............................................................... 18
4.3 Receiver mounting .................................................. 18
4.4 Electrical connection ............................................... 19
4.5 Hose assembly ........................................................ 20
4.6 Compressed air connections ................................... 21
4.6.1 Vacuum fill solenoid ................................................ 21
4.6.2 Pulse clean solenoid ............................................... 21
4.7 Commissioning ........................................................ 22
5 Start-up .................................................................. 23
5.1 Start-up checklist ..................................................... 23
5.2 Start-up sequence ................................................... 24
5.2.1 Draw time worksheet ............................................... 24

5.3 Adjusting pick-up probes ......................................... 25
5.3.1 Horizontal pick-up probe ......................................... 25
5.3.2 Vertical pick-up probe ............................................. 25
6 Operation ............................................................... 26
6.1 Notes on operation .................................................. 26
6.2 Switching on/off ....................................................... 26
6.3 Operational sequence ............................................. 27
7 Cleaning ................................................................. 28
7.2 Cleaning .................................................................. 28
8 Maintenance .......................................................... 29
8.2 Cartridge filter maintenance .................................... 30
8.2.1 Cartrigde filter life .................................................... 30
8.2.2 Inspecting and cleaning the cartrigde filter .............. 31
8.3 Material inlet and air outlet seal
maintenance ............................................................ 32
8.4 Discharge gate maintenance .................................. 32
8.5 Vacuum fill valve maintenance ................................ 32

Safety notes1
Safety symbols definitions1.1
1 Safety notes

V The safety alert symbol is used to alert to the potential personal

injury hazards. Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to

V CAUTION with safety alert indicates a potentially hazardous

situation which, if not avoided, could lead to light bodily injuries.



1 Safety notes

open the doors.
1.1.2 Ground icon
1.1.3 No hands icon
1.1.4 Power icon

Safety notes1
Responsibilities of the owner1.2
conveying equipment.
maintenance.
"Safety notes".
immediately.
V The operator has to avoid the entry of foreign substances (metal
parts, stones) reaching the conveying equipment by appropriate
methods.
V The plant owner is responsible for compliance with legally
prescribed accident prevention and safety regulations.
1.3 Proper use
V Only operate the conveying equipment in accordance with the

specified technical data.
V Danger of explosion! Never use the conveying equipment to
process explosive gas or air gas mix. Danger of explosion!
V Danger of explosion! Bulk materials with a minimum ignition
energy of 10mJ may not convey.
V When processing dangerous materials, also comply with the
safety notes which govern the handling of such materials.
V Any modifications and changes on safety devices are prohibited.
manufacturer.
V Never convey materials which may cause a chemical reaction with
the materials of the conveying equipment.
V Eliminate ignition sources, avoid spills and continually clean the
working area.
V Do not convey moist product.

1 Safety notes
V Always keep the operating instructions near the conveying

equipment, within easy reach. Ensure that they are always
complete and legible.
V Observe the safety notes for the connected conveying equipment.

V Ensure that only authorized personnel enter the working and
danger area of the conveying equipment.
which affect safety must be reported immediately to the
responsible member of the staff.
V Before opening or disassembling any part of the conveying
equipment always switch off the main power and air supply.

Safety notes1
Safety devices1.6
1.6 Safety devices
V Operating the conveying equipment without safety devices:

– is dangerous for the health and life of the operator or third
persons
– can damage the conveying equipment or other material
V Only operate the conveying equipment if all safety devices are
installed and fully functional.
V Never open or remove covers or hoods while the equipment is in
operation.
V Never operate the conveying equipment when the housing is open
except sack tip stations.
V Do not modify the electrical safety devices, for example fuses.
Increased risk of accident.
1.7 High voltage

V Protect electrical parts of the conveying equipment against
humidity.
V Modifications to the conveying equipment are prohibited.

regulations related to interoperation with any additional
equipment, e.g. feeding equipment.

– by the responsible Premier / K-Tron customer service.
– or –
– by specialized personnel trained by Premier / K-Tron.
Only use original Premier / K-Tron parts.

1 Safety notes


Application2
Function2.1
2 Application
The 2424 vacuum receiver provides a high capacity sequencing sys-

tem designed to handle powder, pellet, regrind and granular materials.
Recommended uses are for railcar unloading, silo-to-daybin transfer
or in-plant transfer applications up to 6,800 kg/hr [15,000 lb./hr.].
2.1 Function
Vacuum receivers are used in a pneumatic conveying equipment to
receive the incoming stream of air and product. On entering the vac-
uum receiver, the product is directed into the lower section while the
dust laden conveying air stream is drawn through the upper section,
which houses the filtration elements. When the level probe becomes
covered or after a pre-set time, the vacuum is removed and the outlet
valve opened to allow the batch of product to discharge. During the
discharge period, the filters are pulsed to remove the accumulated
dust. Following the discharge period, the vacuum receiver is automat-
ically re-charged with another batch of product and the cycle repeated
on a pull and dump sequence.
Using continuous convey, i.e. where the product is being fed out from
the vacuum receiver continuously while the receiver is drawing prod-
ucts in, different sets of filters are cleaned alternatively under vacuum.
The size of the vacuum receiver is dependent upon the convey rate,
convey distance, material being conveyed, physical restraints and the
power source to be used.

2 Application
2.2 2424 Powder Receiver components
2.2 2424 Powder Receiver components

1 (2) Control valve
(3) Silencer
(4) V-Clamp
2 (5) Filter cartrigde
(6) Receiver mounting cone
3 (7) V-Clamp
4 (8) Gasket seal ring
(9) Gasket
5 (10) Body
(11) Inlet seal
(12) Discharge gate
(13) Seal, discharge gate
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Fig. 2.1 2424 Receiver components

Application2
2424 Pellet Receiver components2.3
2.3 2424 Pellet Receiver components

(1) Control valve
1 (2) V-Clamp
(3) Receiver Retainer
(4) Gasket
(5) Inlet seal
(6) Body
2 (7) Discharge gate
3 (8) Seal, discharge gate
5
6
Fig. 2.2 2424 Receiver components

2 Application
V Danger of dust explosion! Bulk materials with a minimum ignition

energy of 10mJ may not conveying.
V Fluidizing pads can be used only if ignition energy of the product
is more than 10mJ.
V Operate the conveying equipment only with the installed and
operational safety devices.
V The receiver must be cleaned regularly of dirt and dust deposits.
2.4.1 Safety devices

Safety devices are located at the following positions on the receiver:
• All clamp connections (1)
• Grounding straps
1
Fig. 2.3 Safety devices and warnings

Application2
Safety devices and warnings2.4
2.4.2 Warnings
The following warnings are adhered to the receiver.
V Switch off the power and air supply before opening.
V Use ear protection when working with a venturi power unit.
On the Ground/PE connections
V Connect all Ground/PE connections to earth.

3 Technical data
3 Technical data

Designation Vacuum sequencing Central Receiver Type 2424
Conformity
Protection class of electrical IP 65 (Level probe, Solenoid valve)
components
Maximum throughput capacity Pellet receiver up to 6800 kg/hr [15.000 lb./hr.]
Powder receiver up to 3175 kg/hr [7.000 lb./hr.]
For more information see machine data sheet
Max.air pressure for filter 4 bar [60 PSI] water and oil-free
cleaning
Noise level < 70 dB (A) not with Venturi Power Unit
Receiver capacity 134 dm3 [4.74 ft3]
Weight Pellet receiver 75 kg [176 lb.] it depends on configuration
Powder receiver 116 kg [176 lb.] it depends on configuration
Materials of constructions:
Receiver vessel Stainless steel DIN W.- No. 1.4404, AISI 316L or Aluminium
Filter material Polyester or PTFE (Option) Filter cartridge
Seals Natural rubber, white, food quality rubber (FDA)
For more information see machine data sheet and systems project
manual
Operating temperature range -10 to 50°C (14 to 122°F)

Installation4
Transport4.1
4 Installation
Ambient conditions
V Install the conveying equipment only in surroundings conforming
to the technical data (see section 3 and systems project manual).
V Only have the conveying equipment connected and

commissioned by authorized personnel.
4.1 Transport
V Only have the conveying equipment transported by authorized

and qualified personnel.
V Transport the receiver only with a hoisting equipment.
V In order to avoid damage to the receiver only use lifting straps with
of the receiver see section 3 and the mechanical drawings).
to the band.
V Receiver could over balance.

V Make sure all clamps are securely fastened.
1. Fix the lifting straps at the mounting supports or loop the lifting
straps around the upper extension.
2. Ensure that the lifting straps do not slip (e.g. by using clamps).
Fig. 4.1 Transport

4 Installation
4.2 Unpacking
4.2 Unpacking
1. Protect the cable ducts and air pipes etc. from being damaged
before attaching the slings of the lifting tackle.
3. Remove the receiver carefully from the packaging (see section 4.1
Transport).
4. Check the equipment against delivery notes and check them for
transport damage.
4.3 Receiver mounting

• The equipment is installed either at the assembly brackets or
directly over the feeder (see separate dimensional drawing).
• Allow sufficient space for maintenance, calibration and inspection
work.
• Compressed Air connections see section 4.6.
« Clean the installation location.

1. Make sure that the flange the receiver mounts on is level.
2. If a mounting ring is furnished, install the top flange of the ring to
the bottom receiver hopper flange. Mount the bottom flange of the
ring to a matching level flange.
3. Ensure that the discharge gate on the receiver swings freely and
returns to the almost-closed position when the receiver is upright.
4. Mount the receiver to the hopper or mounting ring.
Fig. 4.2 Discharge Gate
If any other type of discharge valve is used, consult the respective in-
stallation instructions in the project manual.

Installation4
Electrical connection4.4
Improper connection of the conveying device can cause danger to life

through electric shock.
V The conveying device may only be connected by qualified
electricians.
1. Connect the conveying device in accordance with the electrical

wiring diagram.
2. Ground the conveying device carefully.

bonding (≤ 0.1 Ω), see the grounding information on the conveying
device.

from the conveying device.

provided wiring diagrams and operating instructions of the controls.

4 Installation
4.5 Hose assembly
4.5 Hose assembly

The entire conveying line and the receivers should be grounded. All
hose sections should have a copper ground wire molded in the hose.
The copper wire should be grounded at each end, preferably using
hose clamps, as shown.
equipment
2. Hose clamp
1 3 4 5
grounding wire 2
fitting)
Fig. 4.3 Hose assembly

wire:
inside of the hose.
fitting.

Installation4
Compressed air connections4.6
• It is important that an 5.5 to 6.9 bar [80 to 100 PSI] source of clean,
dry, compressed air is used for connection to the air accumulator on
each Receiver. Line size must be 9 mm [.375 in] or larger.
« Connect a source of 5.5 to 6.9 bar [80 to 100 PSI] of clean, dry,
compressed air to solenoid valve(s).
4.6.1 Vacuum fill solenoid

• A - Energized
• B - De-Energized 2 2
1 1
(1) Plant Air in
(2) Exhaust
(3) Connection Air Cylinder
A B
3 3
Fig. 4.4 Vacuum fill and inlet option solenoids
4.6.2 Pulse clean solenoid

• A - Energized
• B - De-Energized 1 2 3 1 2 3
(1) Plant Air in

(2) Exhaust
(3) Plug
A B
Fig. 4.5 Pulse clean solenoid (option)

4 Installation
4.7 Commissioning
4.7 Commissioning
« Before the first activation, ensure that the receiver interior is free
of objects such as screws, packaging rests, etc.
For more information see operating instructions and functional design
in the systems project manual.

Start-up5
Start-up checklist5.1
5 Start-up
V Keep away from discharge gate whenever the system is powered

on.

substances:
– Acid
– Iodine
– Chromium
– Bromium

Make sure the material hose has a ground wire. Static electricity can
adversely affect the Central Controller and related panels.
1. Check for proper installation of the receiver to the hopper or

mounting ring, ensuring a level and tight connection
2. Verify an air connection (5.5 to 6.9 bar [80 to 100 PSI]) of clean,
dry, compressed air to the air-operated items on the receiver.
3. Make sure the receiver is connected to the Controller, and that
initial setup has been completed.
After starting the system

4. Verify that the cartridge pulsing is operating correctly. Listen for a
blast(s) of air inside the receiver after each load cycle.
5. Verify that the receiver’s vacuum fill valve is operating properly.
Listen for a click from the solenoid valve at the beginning of each
load cycle and a release of air from the exhaust port at the end of
the cycle
6. Ensure that all solenoids are energizing by feeling for air pulses
from the exhaust ports and listening for a click with each pulse.
7. Make sure the material pick-up probe(s) is adjusted to ensure a
steady material flow.

5 Start-up
5.2 Start-up sequence
5.2 Start-up sequence

« Switch the conveying equipment on/off with the provided controls
Before establishing the draw times, make sure the air flow adjustment
sleeve on the pick-up probe (at the source) is completely open.
1. Before establishing the draw times, make sure the air flow
adjustment sleeve on the pick-up probe (at the source) is
completely open.
2. Use the draw time worksheet below to determine the approximate
draw time.
3. Start with the farthest receiver from the source and set the draw
time based on service from the farthest source (if more than one
source).
4. Program the calculated draw time in the Controller.
5. While the material is being conveyed into a bucket under the
discharge gate of the receiver, slowly adjust the air flow control
sleeve on the pickup probe (at the source) until a steady flow of
material (33.86 kPa [10 in Hg] vacuum at the blower) is achieved.
The blower should never exceed 40.64 kPa [12 in Hg].
6. Run several draw cycles to the receiver and weigh the contents of
each cycle. Increase or decrease the draw time until one draw
cycle (in the bucket) equals the wt./cycle calculated in the
worksheet.
7. Continue with the next receiver in the series. If the receivers share
a common material line, program the draw time of the preceding
receiver and repeat steps 6 and 7. For a receiver on a dedicated
line, repeat step 1, then steps 4 through 7.
5.2.1 Draw time worksheet
(weight of material / cycle)

Draw time = ---------------------------------------------------------------------
(rate / time)
where,
weight/cycle = (receiver capacity factor)x(material bulk density)
Receiver capacity factor : 2424 Receiver = 110 dm3 [4.0 ft.3]
KEY
weight of material = kg [lb.] rate = kg/s [lb.sec.]
cycle = seconds time = seconds

Start-up5
Adjusting pick-up probes5.3
5.3 Adjusting pick-up probes
5.3.1 Horizontal pick-up probe

1. Completely open the air flow adjustment sleeve (2).
While material is being conveyed to the farthest receiver, slowly close
the sleeve until a steady flow of material is achieved. The blower
gauge reading should be between 33.86 kPa [10 in Hg] vacuum and
40.64 kPa [12 in Hg] vacuum. The blower reading should never ex-
ceed 40.64 kPa [12 in Hg] vacuum.
(1) Slotted Holes (open) 1

(2) Air Flow Adjustment Sleeve
(rotate)
2
Fig. 5.1 Horizontal pick-up probe
5.3.2 Vertical pick-up probe

1. Completely open the air flow adjustment sleeve(1) if you are using
a pellet probe.
2. With the probe’s inlet in the material and the system conveying to
the farthest receiver, gradually close sleeve (1) until a steady flow
of material is achieved. The blower gauge reading should be
between 33.86 kPa [10 in Hg] vacuum and 40.64 kPa [12 in Hg]
vacuum. The blower reading should never exceed 40.64 kPa [12
in Hg] vacuum.
If you are using a powder probe, note that some powder materials
may require partial closing of the bottom sleeve (2) to achieve an even
flow of material.
• A = Pellet probe 3
• B = Powder probe
(1) Air Flow Adjustment Sleeve 1
(rotate) 2
(rotate)
(3) Slotted Holes (open)
A B
Fig. 5.2 Vertical Pick-up Probe

6 Operation
6 Operation

substances:
– Acid
– Iodine
– Chromium
– Bromium
6.2 Switching on/off

« Switch the conveying equipment on/off with the provided controls

Operation6
Operational sequence6.3
6.3 Operational sequence
V Keep away from discharge gate whenever the system is powered

on.
The Series 2400 system is designed to keep the hopper below each
receiver full. When the material in the hopper falls below the level in-
dicator, the receiver calls for material. The Central Controller services
the receivers, one at a time, in the order in which they call.
When a receiver’s turn for service arrives, the following material call
sequence is initiated:
1. The vacuum fill valve energizes.

2. Material is conveyed into the receiver for the draw time
programmed in the Controller.
3. The vacuum fill valve de-energizes, ending the service cycle.
When the service cycle ends, the weight of the material inside the re-
ceiver hopper pushes the discharge gate open and then empties. If
the high level switch in the hopper below is not covered with material,
another call for service is established.
If the receiver is equipped for (pulse-jet filter cartridge cleaning), the

filter cartridge will be pulsed after the completion of each load cycle.
The number and frequency of pulses is set via the Controller. Another
call for service will not be established until the pulsing is complete.

7 Cleaning
7 Cleaning

device there is a danger of injury through unintentional switching-on.
V Switch off the feeding system before carrying out maintenance
work on the conveying device and secure it against unintentional
restarting (see chapter 7.1).

out procedure.
7.2 Cleaning
Aggressive and toxic cleaning agents damage the receiver and

represent an increased accident risk.
V Do not clean the receiver with corrosive cleaning agents.
V Use only safe cleaning agents and disinfectants in receiver used
for foods.
V Do not clean the receiver with high-pressure devices.

Maintenance8
Maintenance intervals8.1
8 Maintenance

on.
V Switch off the conveying equipment before carrying out
maintenance work on the equipment and secure it against
unintentional restarting (see section 7.1).
line from the air accumulator/vacuum fill valve. Do not use the
vacuum fill valve cylinder as a handle to lift the lid.

Mechanics « Eliminate dust accumulation more « As required

than 5 mm [0.2 in] through
cleaning.
« Check compressed air
« Empty water-separator
« Check convey and vacuum line
mechanical connections for
tightness.
« Check seal rings for damage
« Check safety symbols at the
equipment for legibility and
completeness.
« Check pressure regulator « Annually
« Check reverse jet pulse valves « 6 months
« Change filters « As required
Electric « Check ground wires and static « As required
bonding.
« Check all electrical connections

8 Maintenance
8.2 Cartridge filter maintenance
8.2 Cartridge filter maintenance
V Before removing the receiver head to access the filter cartridge,

detach the air line from the air accumulator/vacuum fill valve. Do
not use the vacuum fill valve cylinder as a handle to lift the lid.
If cross-contamination is a concern, it is strongly recommended that

the filter cartridge assembly be completely replaced during product
change-over. A filter cartridge assembly is available from the Premier
Spare Parts Department.
8.2.1 Cartrigde filter life

• Moisture in the cartridge filter will shorten its life (see section 9.1).
• Over time, the cartridge filter element can be damaged if the air
pressure exceeds 6.895 bar [100 PSI], or if pulsing is too frequent.
• When the cartridge filter element becomes blinded, its pressure
differential becomes too great. This differential in pressure can be
measured by attaching a differential pressure gauge to the
connection on the housing and the plenum. If this pressure
differential occurs, the filter element will need to be cleaned or
replaced. If this occurs too quickly, the air pulsing may not be
adequate. Ensure proper air pulsing, timer settings, compressed air
supply, and valve operation as described in other parts of this
manual.
Fig. 8.1 Filter cartridge

Maintenance8
Cartridge filter maintenance8.2
8.2.2 Inspecting and cleaning the cartrigde filter
Turn off the compressed air supply and pulse the cartridge filter to
empty compressed air from the accumulator before proceeding.
Do not use water at high pressure when rinsing the cartridge filter.
1. Allow the timer control to pulse-clean the cartridge filter for a time
1 without any dust or air loading.
2. Shut off the compressed air supply and disconnect it from the unit
only after the accumulator is no longer pressurized.
3. Unhook the quick-release clamp (2) and carefully remove the top
plenum section (1). Lift the cartridge filter (3) from the housing (4).
4. If the cartridge filter appears damp or encrusted, before cleaning
or replacement see section 9.1 troubleshooting - damp or
2 encrusted cartridge filter.
5. Using compressed air (6.895 bar [100 PSI] maximum), clean the
3 cartridge filter to remove as much dust as possible. Keep the air
nozzle at least 152 mm [6 in] away from the filter, and always spray
from the inside out (same as the pulsing occurs during operation).
6. Inspect the cartridge filter for damage. If damaged, continue with
step 10 below. If the cartridge is now clean, continue with step 11.
If a more thorough cleaning is required, continue with step 7.
4
7. Allow the cartridge filter to soak for 5 minutes in a solution of mild
dishwashing detergent, mixed at 2% soap to 98% warm water. For
extra cleaning, gently agitate the water by running a compressed
air hose into the container while holding the cartridge filter.
8. Rinse the cartridge filter thoroughly using a water hose from the
inside to the outside.
9. Allow the cartridge filter to dry completely. This will take at least 48
hours at 21°C / 70° F. Protect the cartridge filter from dust during
the drying process.
10. If the cartridge filter is unusable after cleaning, it must be replaced.
Replacement cartridge filters are available from Premier’s Spare
Parts Department.
11. Ensure that the gaskets (located on the cartridge filter’s flange) are
in good condition. Reassemble the receiver by lowering the
cartridge filter element (3) into the housing (4) , placing the top
(plenum) section (1) on top of the housing, and securing the quick-
release clamp (2) .
12. Connect compressed air to the accumulator.
Fig. 8.2 Disassemble Filter
It is essential that a new nylon-insert lock nut is used to secure the flap
and retainers.

8 Maintenance
8.3 Material inlet and air outlet seal maintenance
8.3 Material inlet and air outlet seal

maintenance
« Check the seal inside each material inlet for wear, and replace if
necessary.
8.4 Discharge gate maintenance

« Check for wear on the discharge gate’s rubber seal to ensure a
tight seal, and replace if necessary.
8.5 Vacuum fill valve maintenance

« Check the urethane seal in the vacuum fill valve at the top of the
receiver for wear. If it needs to be replaced, remove the lock nut
that secures the retainer washer, urethane seal, and the flap
retainer. Then place a new urethane seal between the retainer
washer and the flap retainer.

Troubleshooting9
9 Troubleshooting
Eliminating faults in a conveying equipment which is running can

1. Always switch off the conveying equipment before carrying out

repairs.
connected control device or host computer (see operating
instructions for the relevant control device).
Error Cause Remedy
Convey cycle does • Receiver full « Empty receiver.

not start • Buffer hopper full « Wait until material level in buffer
hopper drops below level sensor.
• Level sensor activated « Adjust or replace level sensor.
No material • Bridging / ratholing at pick-up « Break bridge / rathole. Vibration /
conveyed during the aeration may be required at pick-up
convey cycle to ensure reliable flow into convey
line.
• Hopper at pick-up empty « Refill hopper.
• Blockage in convey line « Free blockage.
• Leak in system « Close all valves correctly. Check all
connections are secure and leak-
free.

9 Troubleshooting
Error Cause Remedy
System does not • Solid to air ratio is too lean « Adjust pick-up device to increase
convey enough solid to air ratio (see section 5.3).
material • Overfill in the receiver « Draw time may be to long. Check
setting.
• Leak in system « Check all valves are closed
correctly. Check all connections
and seals are secure and leak-free.
« Check the seal inside each
material inlet for wear. A worn seal
will decrease the conveying rate in
receivers with two inlets, as well as
in receivers on common material
lines.
« Check the discharge gate for
proper sealing. A worn rubber seal
or bent discharge gate will
decrease the conveying rate in all
receivers.
• Blocked filter
« Check all filters. Replace if
necessary.
« Ensure that Pulse Clean for the
receiver is set for more than 0
pulses per cycle. If so, the filter
pulse may need to be adjusted to 3
or more.
« If the material is excessively dusty
or too fine for the filter element, a
pellet receiver can be upgraded for
static filter.
• Kinks “Goose necks” in flex hose « Straighten flex hose.
• Air intake at pick-up blocked « Free air intake at pick-up.
• Vacuum fill valve will not operate « Check for the proper operation of
the vacuum fill valve.
• Leak in Vacuum fill valve « Check the urethane seal inside all
the receivers’ vacuum fill valves. A
worn seal will decrease the
conveying rate during material
loading of other receivers in the
system.

Troubleshooting9
Error Cause Remedy
Vacuum fill valve will • Solenoid valve not energized « Check for the correct voltage (24
not operate volts DC) to the solenoid valve from
the control panel during the fill
cycle (see wiring schematics).
• Solenoid valve burned out « The coil may be burned out. A
replacement solenoid valve is
available as a spare part.
• Dirt in the solenoid valve « Remove the valve core, and clean
out any dirt, scale, or rust with
compressed air. If the valve core is
damaged or worn, replace it.
• Not enough air « Check for the proper air supply of
5.5 to 6.9 bar [80 to 100 PSI] of
clean, dry, compressed air to the
solenoid valve. Also, check the air
connections.
• Air cylinder damaged « Check for the correct operation of
the air cylinder. A replacement air
cylinder is available as a spare
part.
Damp or encrusted • Moisture in the compressed air « Check for moisture in the
filter compressed air source connected
to the receivers. The air must be
dry.
• Pulse valve not working « The solenoid and pilot valves,
which control the pulsing of the
filter, may not be operating
properly.
• Pulse filter setting « Ensure that Pulse Clean for the
receiver is set for more than 0
pulses per cycle. If so, the filter
pulse may need to be adjusted to 3
or more.
• Dirty filter « Disassemble the filter cartrigde and
clean the filter.

9 Troubleshooting
Error Cause Remedy
Poor filter life • Moisture in the compressed air « If your unit is a powder receiver,
ensure that the air from the
compressed air source is dry.
Moisture on the filters causes rot,
shortening the filter life.
• Dust and conveying air « Check the dust and conveying air
for corrosive conditions.
• Overfill from receiver « The draw time may be too long,
causing an overfill in the receiver.
Check setting.
Dirty exhaust air • Filter installation « Check for proper installation of the
filter element.
• Damaged filter « Check the filter for wear or holes,
and replace if needed.
• Dirty air « If your receiver is a powder
receiver, ensure that the air from
the compressed air source is clean.
Sluggish pulsing • Less air pressure « Ensure that the air pressure in the
air accumulator recovers quickly to
a pressure of 80 to 100 PSI after
each pulse.
• Problems with pilot valve « The pilot valve may not be
operating properly.
Pilot valve • Pilot valve stays open « If the pilot valve stays open,
malfunction compressed air will flow
continuously through the filter. The
bleed hole in the valve may be
obstructed. Disassemble the valve
and clean the bleed hole, or
replace the valve.
• Pilot valve stays closed « If the pilot valve stays closed,
compressed air will not pulse the
filter. The diaphragm inside the
valve may be broken. Replace the
valve, if necessary.
• Pilot valve is not working « Check for tight connections from
the pilot valve to the air
accumulator and housing.
« Check filter pulse solenoid.

Troubleshooting9
Error Cause Remedy
Pulse solenoid • Malfunction from solenoid valve « Check for dirt in the solenoid valve.
malfunction Clean with compressed air.
« If a continuous flow of air is felt from
the exhaust port, the solenoid
armature is not seated properly.
Remove the valve core, and clean
out any dirt, scale, or rust. If the
valve core is damaged or worn, it
will need to be replaced.
« If there is no air flow from the
exhaust port of the solenoid valve,
check for the correct electrical
connection to the solenoid valve.
« If there is correct voltage to the
solenoid valve (24 volts DC), check
for a drop in voltage across the
solenoid coil during its designated
pulse cycle. If full voltage is
detected across the coil during the
pulse cycle, the coil may be burned
out.

9 Troubleshooting

K-TRON PREMIER Product Specification 2424 Pellet
2424 Vacuum Sequencing Central Pellet Receiver Receiver
Application
The 2424 pellet receiver provides a high capacity sequencing system
designed to handle pellets as well as regrind and granular materials.
Recommended uses are for silo-to-daybin transfer, in-plant transfer or
railcar unloading applications up to 6,800 kg/hr [15,000 lb/hr].
The 2424 receiver is available in two versions for either general keep
full conveying or loss-in-weight (LIW) feeder refill applications, with
a selection of various discharge valve types (gravity or butterfly),
depending on the application and material to be fed.
Receivers for keep-full applications are fitted with a gravity gate dis-
charge valve. When material level in the storage hopper drops below
the level indicator, the receiver is signaled to begin drawing material.
The fill sequence continues until the material level in the hopper is
above the level indicator.
Receivers designed for loss-in-weight feeder refill applications are
fitted with a level sensor and require a butterfly valve. The receiver
draws material until it is full and waits for a signal from the feeder
2424 pellet receiver
below to open the discharge valve and dispense the material. This in painted carbon steel
cycle is then repeated. with gravity discharge gate
Design
The 2424 receiver is available in either carbon steel (painted) or
stainless steel construction. Each receiver has a stainless steel check
valve to allow multiple receivers to draw material from a common
conveying line. The 2424 pellet receiver features a perforated screen
filter section.
Central system units for the 2424 receivers utilize a common vacu- Technical Data
um blower package, and are primarily used on multiple-destination
Standard Mechanical Specifications
applications where larger conveying rates or long distances are
• Available in carbon steel with epoxy coated interior and painted RAL
required.
7035 gray exterior or 1.4301 (AISI 304) stainless steel construction
• Volume capacity 134 dm3 [4.74 ft3]
Mechanical Features
• 559 mm [22 in] diameter housing
• Rugged modular design
• Up to 102 mm [4 in] tangential inlet with stainless steel check valve
• Quick-connect clamps for easy cleaning and filter maintenance
assembly
• Full support discharge flange for mounting
• Stainless steel band clamps
• Integral air control valve with backside vent, dual acting air cylinder
Controls
with solenoid control 24 VDC
The receiver is available with controls suitable for use with either a • One-piece stainless steel 254 mm [10 in] gravity discharge gate
solid state microprocessor controller (MPC) or a programmable logic with white Neoprene seal - keep full versions
controller (PLC). Both control systems utilize 24 VDC low voltage and • Butterfly gate valve - LIW feeder refill versions
are available with installation kits making installation easy and more • Inductive proximity switch level-sensing system (24 VDC) on gravity
economical. The receiver controls include color coded quick connec- gate - keep full versions only
tors and provide communication to the central controller. • Powered discharge gates with single coil solenoid (energize to
For single receiver applications, we offer the LSR Controller. In loss- open valve, proof switch in closed position)
in-weight feeder refill applications, the LSR Controller seamlessly
interfaces with K-Tron Feeder controls. Standard Filtration Options
• Perforated filter element for pellets
Standard Electrical Specifications
Conveying Rates
• Signal voltage 24 VDC
Based on a distance of 15 m [50 ft] and bulk density of 0.5 kg/
dm3 [31 lb/ft3]. Rates vary with material characteristics, conveying Pellet Receiver Weights
distance and plant layout. • 75 kg [165 lb] depending on discharge configuration
Pellet Receiver Operating Temperature

Up to 6,800 kg/hr [15,000 lb/hr] • -10o C to +50o C [14o F to 122o F]
Rev. 2009-11 S-502418-en

Doc# 0990034303 www.ktron.com Page 1 of 2
K-TRON PREMIER Product Specification 2424 Pellet
2424 Vacuum Sequencing Central Pellet Receiver Receiver
Dimensions of 2424 Pellet Receiver mm [in]

for general keep full conveying for loss-in-weight feeder refill
101.6 [4] O.D.

C
L
196.9 [7.75]
558.8 [22] DIA
PLANT
AIR IN
C
L
368.6 [14.51]
[4] O.D.
80-100 PSI
101.6
IN-PLANT AIR REQ’D.
363 [14.38]
953.7 [37.55]
TOP VIEW
1620.3 [63.79]
(TYPICAL BOTH VERSIONS)
31.8 [1.25]
247.6 [9.75]
304.8 [12]
101.6 [4] O.D.
469.9 [18.5]
206.4 [8.13]
PLANT AIR IN
101.6 [4] O.D.
(4) 014.3 [0.56] 133.4 [5.25]

1122.1 [44.18]
254 [10] SIDE MOUNTING PROFILE

(OPTIONAL MOUNTING BRACKET)
963.8 [37.94]
659.6 [25.97]
574.7 [22.63]
346.1 [13.63]
469.9 [18.5]
254 [10]
597.7 [23.53]
OPTIONAL
607 [23.88]
MOUNTING
BRACKET
BUTTERFLY GATE DISCHARGE
254 [10]
Options
(14) 14.3 [0.56] DIA. HLS. Mechanical
EQ. SPC'D. ON A 558.8 [22]
DIA. BOLT CIRCLE • Mounting bracket for LIW feeder refill versions
• Pipe mounting kit
584.2 [23]
CL • Flange for discharge gate valve (volume capacity 130 dm3 [4.6 ft3])
other volumes available upon request
IMPORTANT NOTE • Weatherhood for outdoor use
FOR GATE DISCHARGE
CLEARANCE, THE MOUNTING • Custom material combinations
25.4 [1]
DIAMETER MUST BE 495.3 [19.5]
INSIDE DIAMETER.
• Reduced inlet tube size to meet smaller capacity applications
OFFSET CL • Vibrator as discharge aid
• Aeration pads as discharge aid
• Enclosure for solenoids
• Air-actuated gate assemblies (butterfly valve & knife gates)
Electrical
• Mounting bracket for terminal box or controller
• Level probes (capacitive or tuning fork type)
• Limit switches on butterfly or slide gate valve
• LSR controller
• Central Microprocessor or PLC control
• Stainless steel options on solenoids, gauges as required
• Solenoid boxes supplied loose in mild or stainless steel finish
• Terminal box mounted in mild or stainless steel finish
• For ATEX compliant versions contact factory
Note: For more information on these products consult your K-Tron / Premier Sales Representative.
Caution: Measurements are for general reference only. Please consult dimensional drawing for exact measurements.
Rev.
K-Tron Process Group www.ktron.com 2009-11
S-502418-en
All addresses on sheet: / Alle Adressen auf Blatt: / Toutes les adresses sur fiche: I-000001 Page 2 of 2
Copyright by K-TRON. Covered by patents in USA and foreign countries. Specifications subject to change without notice.
Pulse-Clean
K-TRON PREMIER Product Specification In-Line Filter
2400 Pulse-Clean In-Line Secondary Filter and Group and Group
Application
Typically used on systems where the primary receiver utilizes a
screen separator. The 2400 pulse-clean in-line secondary filter can be
used where frequent manual cleaning of the static unit would not be
practical. The filter elements are automatically pulse-cleaned during
periods when the system is not conveying. The 100 mm [4 in] inlet/
outlet configuration uses a large filter cartridge. The smaller 50 and
76 mm [2 and 3 in] inlet/outlets use filter bags.
Design
The pulse-clean in-line filter works like a powder receiver unit and has
quick-access for easy filter inspection and maintenance. The filters
pulse for a period of time when the blower shuts down.
Central system units for the pulse-clean in-line filter utilize a com-
mon vacuum blower package, and are primarily used on multiple-
destination applications where larger conveying rates or long dis-
tances are required.
Pulse-Clean In-Line Filter Group

The pulse-clean in-line filter group includes modular in-line filter with
mounting plate, fines collection kit (indludes flex sock adapter, clamp,
filter sock and drum with clamp), 6 m [20 ft] of flexible hose, carbon 50 & 76 mm [2 & 3 in]
steel support stand and assembly hardware. The assembly is available Pulse-Clean In-Line
for 50, 76 and 100 mm [2, 3 and 4 in] line sizes. Secondary Filter Receiver
Mechanical Features
100 mm [4 in] Pulse-Clean In-Line
• Rugged modular design
Secondary Filter Group
• Quick-connect clamps for easy cleaning and filter maintenance
(fines collection kit not shown)
• Wall mounting bracket
Controls In-Line Filter Weight

The pulse-clean in-line filter is available with controls suitable for use • 23 kg [50 lb] depending on discharge configuration
with either a solid state microprocessor controller, a programmable In-Line Filter Group Weight
logic controller or the LSR Controller.
• 73 kg [160 lb] depending on discharge configuration
Technical Data for 50 & 76 mm [2 & 3 in] Operating Temperature
• -10o C to +50o C [14o F to 122o F]
• Aluminum construction, outside surfaces painted RAL 7035 gray
• Tool-less stainless steel band clamps
Pulse-Clean In-Line Filter Options
• One-piece stainless steel 127 mm [5 in] discharge gate with white Mechanical
neoprene seal • 1.4301 (AISI 304) or 1.4404 (AISI 316) stainless steel construction
• Automatic reverse jet cleaning 1.7 dm3 [.06 ft3] air reservoir; 6.9 • Bead blast surface finish (1.8 micron Ra)
bar max [100 psig] • Flange for discharge gate valve
• CE compliant 50 & 76 mm [2 & 3 in]: volume capacity of 10 dm3 [0.36 ft3]
• 454 g [16 oz] polyester cloth filter bag with snap-ring seal for pow- 100 mm [4 in]: volume capacity of 28.3 dm3 [1 ft3]
der, total 0.37 m2 [4 ft2] filter area other volumes available upon request
• PTFE membrane on filter elements
Technical Data for 100 mm [4 in] • Weatherhood for outdoor use
Standard Mechanical Specifications • Custom material combinations
• Carbon steel construction, outside surfaces painted RAL 7035 • Enclosure for solenoids
gray • 9.3 m2 [100 ft2] cartridge element
• 100 mm [4 in] inlet/outlet
Electrical
• Tool-less stainless steel band clamps • Mounting bracket for terminal box or controller
• One-piece stainless steel 127 mm [5 in] discharge gate with white • Level probes (capacitive or tuning fork type)
Neoprene seal • Differential pressure switch
• Automatic reverse jet cleaning 5.66 dm3 [0.2 ft3] air reservoir; 6.9 • LSR Controller
bar max [100 psig] • Central Microprocessor or PLC control
• CE compliant • Stainless steel options on solenoids, gauges as required
• Spun-bond polyester cartridge filter, total 4.6 m2 [50 ft2] filter • Solenoid boxes supplied loose in mild or stainless steel finish
area • Terminal box mounted in mild or stainless steel finish
• For ATEX and NEC compliant versions contact factory
Rev. 2009-11 S-502417-en

Pulse-Clean
K-TRON PREMIER Product Specification In-Line Filter
2400 Pulse-Clean In-Line Secondary Filter and Group and Group
Dimensions mm [in] Dimensions mm [in]

50 & 76 mm [2 & 3 in] Pulse-Clean In-Line Filter 100 mm [4 in] Pulse-Clean In-Line Filter
A OD
CL
A DIA CL AIR EXHAUST

CL B
B
CL INLET
E 330 [13] E
320 D OD
C
[12.63]
C
5.5 - 6.9 bar
212
[80-100 PSI]
[8.38]
IN-PLANT AIR REQ’D
228 [9]
203
H [8] D OD
F OD
(4) 9 [0.38] DIA J
228 [9]
MOUNTING HOLES K J
G
F OD H
NOTE:
PANEL IS NOT REQ’D
ON PULSE-CLEAN IN-LINE K
FILTER UNITS USED WITH A (4) 9 [0.38] DIA G
PLC CONTROLLER 254 [10]
MOUNTING HOLES 60°
NOTE:
298
19 [0.75] MAX PANEL IS NOT REQ’D ON 254 [10]
[11.75]
PULSE-CLEAN IN-LINE FILTER
25.4 [1] OFFSET UNITS USED WITH A PLC
(6) 9 [0.38] DIA HLS
ON A 305 [12] DBC CONTROLLER 19 [0.75] MAX
25.4 [1] OFFSET
330 [13] OD CL (6) 9 [0.38] DIA HOLES
ON A 305 [12] DBC
330 [13] OD CL
127 [5] OD
CL
127 [5] OD
254 [10] DIA OPENING REQ’D CL
ON MOUNTING SURFACE OF 254 [10] DIA OPENING REQ’D
CUSTOMER’S EQUIPMENT ON MOUNTING SURFACE OF
CUSTOMER’S EQUIPMENT
Note: Refer to Product Catalog Section 24 for complete support stand and fines collection kit dimensions.
2400 Pulse-Clean In-Line Secondary Filter Receivers

Size
A B C D E F G H J K
mm [in]
50 [2] 254 69 292 50 196 50 314 952 1238 469
OD [10] [2.75] [11.5] [2] [7.75] [2] [12.38] [37.5] [48.75] [18.5]
76 [3] 381 114 298 76 266 76 460 1194 1492 628
OD [15] [4.5] [11.75] [3] [10.5] [3] [18.13] [47] [58.75] [24.75]
100 [4] 508 177 254 100 330 100 435 1143 1736 619
OD [20] [7] [10] [4] [13] [4] [17.13] [45] [18.38] [24.38]
K-Tron Process Group www.ktron.com Rev. S-502417-en

2009-11
K-TRON PREMIER Product Specification Series 4 MPC
Series 4 Microprocessor Controller (MPC) Controller
Application
The Premier Pneumatics Series 4 MPC Controller controls up to
24 vacuum receivers on one blower with one back-up blower. The
Series 4 MPC Controller is designed to be used with both P-Series
and 2400 Series Receivers. It can control traditional “keep full” re-
ceivers that fill and dump until a vessel below is full and/or Premier‘s
line of “refill” receivers that fill and hold material until a dump request
is received.
A low-voltage cable system with quick-connect plugs allows the
receivers to be connected to the central controller without tools. In
addition, low-voltage wiring generally does not require an electrician,
allowing for a less expensive electrical installation.
Design
The controller consists of a microprocessor central control unit
which features an easy-to-use, touch-sensitive keypad. The opera-
tor controls the whole system, including turning receivers on and off,
setting draw times from one central location and starting the systems
blower package.
The Series 4 MPC Controller can be integrated into the K-Tron

SmartConnex feeder controls, providing one simple control solution
for both feeders and vacuum sequencing receivers. It can operate as
a slave to the K-Vision Line Controller or K-Tron Smart Commander
process visualization software. The unit is shipped pre-programmed,
eliminating complex logic programming.
Technical Data
• 305 x 254 x 127 mm [12 x 10 x 5 in] enclosure
• LED visual indicators inform operator of receiver's status
• Easy on-screen system setup
• Back-up blower capability Communication
• Blower shutdown feature to allow in-line filters to pulse-clean
• 3 levels of password protection to restrict access Series 4 MPC Blower Motor Series 2400
• Rated for -10° to 60° C [ 14° to 140° F] Controller Starter Panel Blower
• Network capability and computer interface for data acquisition
• Standard RS-485 Modbus 4-wire host communication serial chan- Series 4 Controller
nel MAIN BLOWER BACKUP BLOWER

T
• Quick-connect cabling for fast and trouble-free installation MENU
4
HOME
5
9
6
ALARM
RUN
• IP65 [NEMA 12] control panel and receiver panel ESC

1
C
2
!
3
ENTER
STOP
CAUTION - Disconnect power before opening.
• CE compliant
115/230 VAC, 50/60 HZ, 200 Watts (Max)
CAUTION: HIGH VOLTAGE

DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE WITHOUT
FIRST DISCONNECTING POWER SUPPLY.
THE USE OF A NON-CONDUCTIVE TOOL
IS RECOMMENDED FOR ALL ADJUSTMENTS
• Power supply data 88-264 VAC input / 24 VDC 150 Watt output
WITHIN THIS ELECTRICAL ENCLOSURE.
• 300 Watts max

• 5 languages available: English, German, French, Spanish, Italian
Standard Programmable Features

• Program receivers to fill to level switch or by time COMMUNICATION
IN
COMMUNICATION
OUT
COMMUNICATION
IN
COMMUNICATION
OUT
COMMUNICATION
IN
COMMUNICATION
OUT
COMMUNICATION
IN
COMMUNICATION
OUT
• 4 programmable receiver modes

FILL VALVE PULSE CLEAN FILL VALVE PULSE CLEAN FILL VALVE PULSE CLEAN FILL VALVE PULSE CLEAN
INHIBIT INHIBIT INHIBIT INHIBIT
FILL AUX DUMP GATE FILL AUX DUMP GATE FILL AUX DUMP GATE FILL AUX DUMP GATE
DUMP REQUEST CALL REQUEST DUMP REQUEST CALL REQUEST DUMP REQUEST CALL REQUEST DUMP REQUEST CALL REQUEST
RATIO/PURGE RATIO/PURGE RATIO/PURGE RATIO/PURGE

RECEIVER LEVEL RECEIVER LEVEL RECEIVER LEVEL RECEIVER LEVEL
Series 4 2400 Control Series 4 2400 Control Series 4 2400 Control Series 4 2400 Control
• 4 programmable pulse-clean modes

Copyright 2000 Phoenix Mecano Inc
• Access protection
• Blower shutdown
• Blower select Receivers: 1 2...(22) 23 24
Hazardous Location Options:

NEC Class II, Div. 2, Group F & G
ATEX 3D
Rev. 2009-03 S-501803-en

K-TRON PREMIER Product Specification Series 4 MPC
Series 4 Microprocessor Controller (MPC) Controller
Dimensions mm [in] 203

[8]
324 305
[12.75] [12]
254
[10]
(4) 8 [.31] DIA

MOUNTING HOLES
127
[5]
Part No. # of Receivers # of Blowers Supply Voltage Receiver Voltage

5741-94 1 to 24 1 + spare 88-264 VAC 24 VDC
Optional Inhibit Panel is used for local ON/OFF control of receivers. Use the quick-
connect 3 m [10 ft] cable (supplied with panel) to connect the panel to the I/O block.
When the selector switch is placed in the INHIBIT position, the receiver will be disabled.
Part No. 5741-81
41
[1.63]
19 [0.75]
79
[3.13]
40
[1.56]
41
[1.63]
83 [3.25]
K-Tron Process Group www.ktron.com S-501803-en

UNLESS OTHERWISE SHOWN ALL DIMENSIONS
ARE IN MILLIMETERS [INCHES].
444.5 [17.5 in] 444.5 [17.5 in] 127 [5 in]

12.7 [.5 in]
50.8 [2 in]
76.2 [3 in]
(4) n11.1 [.438 in] X
25.4 [1 in] SLOTS
1 812.8 [32 in] 165.1 [6.5 in]
(6) n7.9 [.313 in] X
200 [7.875 in]

12.7 [.5 in] SLOTS
19.1 [.75 in]

130.2 [5.125 in]
2
444.5 [17.5 in] 444.5 [17.5 in]
125.4 [4.938 in]
157.2 [6.188 in]
263.5 [10.375 in]
101.6 [4 in] 519.1 [20.438 in]

200 [7.875 in]
38.1 [1.5 in] 38.1 [1.5 in] 38.1 [1.5 in]
330.2 [13 in]

25.4 [1 in]
1149.4 [45.25 in]

533.4 [21 in]
152.4 [6 in]
38.1 [1.5 in]
266.7 [10.5 in] 279.4 [11 in] 304.8 [12 in] 279.4 [11 in] 92.1 [3.625 in]
3 n6.4 [.25 in] 50.8 [2 in] 50.8 [2 in] 4

n76.2 [3 in] (4) HOLES 25.4 [1 in] 25.4 [1 in]
336.6 [13.25 in]

530.2 [20.875 in]
444.5 [17.5 in] 203.2 [8 in]
82.6 [3.25 in]

235 [9.25 in]
158.8 [6.25 in]
123.8 [4.875 in]
393.7 [15.5 in]

355.6 [14 in]
n9.9 [.391 in] 444.5 [17.5 in]

(14) HOLES 127 [5 in]
101.6 [4 in]
1143 [45 in]
73 [2.875 in]
19.1 [.75 in]
444.5 [17.5 in] 444.5 [17.5 in] 130.2 [5.125 in]
1003.3 [39.5 in] 73 [2.875 in]
TITLE:
1:8 TOLERANCE CLASS: coarse
DRIVE GUARD STYLE 2 BASE SCALE
DRAWN: 4/7/2010 KB
DRAWING NOTES: 6M-25/30HP APPROVED: 4/7/2010 PPI
1. DEBURR ALL SHARP EDGES. CATEGORY Standard PAGE 1 OF 1
2. PAINT PER ITEM 5.
4219-36 B
REV
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED C 2009
SPARE PARTS LIST
PART NO. F15215-41

S-NO.
DESCRIPTION: 4"OD INLINE FLTR GRP PU CLN CE
Item Part See Quantity

No. No. Description Notes Per Unit
1 5215-41 FIL,INLINE 4" PUCLN 24 VDC AL SUB 1.0

2 5316-62 STAND,SUP 2400 INLINE FIL-ALL 1.0
3 2310-491 HOSE CLEAR 4"ID W/GROUND WIRE 20.0
4 2450-3 CLP,HOSE SS 4-1/8"TO 5"ID 8.0
8 5507-95 KIT,CONVERSION FINES COLLECT SUB 1.0
Notes: RSP Item is a recommended spare part.

SUB Item is a subassembly. Parts information is on a following page or in a separate section of this
manuals as specified in the manual index.

606 N. Front St. / P.O. Box
Information subject to change 17
without notice. Salina, KS 67402-0017
SPARE PARTS LIST
PART NO. 5741-99

S-NO.
DESCRIPTION: SERIES 4 2400 CONT MPC ATEX

805 2129-33 POWER SUPPLY,24VDC 6.A CHASSIS RSP 1.0

808 2139-36 PC BOARD, SERIES 4 CPU RSP 1.0
809 2139-37 PC BOARD, SERIES 4 I/O RSP 1.0
811 2139-39 OVERLAY/KEYPAD S4 2400 RSP 1.0


SPARE PARTS LIST
PART NO. 5741-93

S-NO.
DESCRIPTION: SERIES 4 2400 RCVR PANEL

807 2139-31 PC BOARD, SERIES 4 RCVR RSP 1.0


SPARE PARTS LIST
PART NO. 5713-12

S-NO.
DESCRIPTION: MOTOR STARTER 32-43 AMPS24VDC

801 2121-176 AUX CONTACT, N.O.,KT7 SERIES RSP 1.0

802 2121-184 MTR CIR CONTROLLER,45AMP,KT7 RSP 1.0
803 2121-216 CONTACTOR,MAX 43 AMPS RSP 1.0


SPARE PARTS LIST
PART NO. 5507-95

S-NO.
DESCRIPTION: KIT,CONVERSION FINES COLLECT

1 5311-33 ADP,AL 10"FLEX SOCK 1.0

2 2450-7 CLP,HOSE SS 9-7/8" TO10-3/4"ID 1.0
3 2313-209 SOCK, FILTER FINES COLL. KIT RSP 1.0
4 2812-2 BARREL,30GAL W/CLAMP & LID 1.0


Information subject to change 606 N. Front St. / P.O. Box 17
SPARE PARTS LIST
PART NO. 5314-57

S-NO.
DESCRIPTION: PROBE,HORIZ AL 4"OD

1 2614-69 RGS,O RUB 3-7/8"ID X 4-3/8"OD RSP 2.0


SPARE PARTS LIST
PART NO. 5309-141

S-NO.
DESCRIPTION: VLV,VAC-BRKR 5" COMPLT ASSY

1 5309-136 VLV,VAC-BRKR 6" BARE VALVE SUB 1.0

2 2315-707 SLND,2POS 4WAY,24VDC RSP 1.0


SPARE PARTS LIST
PART NO. 5309-136

S-NO.
DESCRIPTION: VLV,VAC-BRKR 6" BARE VALVE

2 3305-182 RET,PLT BACK 6"VAC BKR RSP 1.0

4 2310-42 TUBE,PLASTIC 1/4"OD .033WL IE 120.0
5 2311-209 EL,1/4NPTX1/4TUBE PLASTIC 1.0
6 2311-225 FTG,ADP STR 1/4 NP X 1/4"OD 1.0
7 2320-40 CYL,AIR 2-1/2"BORE X 5" STROKE RSP 1.0
12 3305-183 RET,PLT FRONT 6"VAC BKR 1.0
13 2426-2 ROD,THD PLTD 3/8"-16NC RAW STK 24.7
14 3417-130 SEAL,VAC BRKR 6"VLV RSP 1.0
15 3501-133 ADP,6"VAC BRKT VLV PIPE 1.0
16 3501-165 ADP,6"VAC BRKT VLV SHIELD 1.0


SPARE PARTS LIST
PART NO. 5215-41

S-NO.
DESCRIPTION: FIL,INLINE 4" PUCLN 24 VDC AL

1 4121-114 HEADER ASS'Y, POWDER RCVR 1.0

2 2451-54 CLP,1555 V-BAND RSP 1.0
3 2313-235 CARTRIDGE,FLT 12-3/4"X18"LG RSP 1.0
4 4122-128 BODY SECTION 4" PULSE CLEAN 1.0
5 3428-39 GATE, 2400 DISCHARGE SS 1.0
6 2604-1 SEAL,2400 DISCHARGE GATE RSP 1.0
10 2313-239 FLTR,1/8"MNPT RSP 1.0
11 2460-356 FTG,PIPE GALV PLUG 1/8 SOC HD 2.0
12 2311-272 FTG,TEE 1/8"NPT X 1/4" X 1/4" 1.0
13 2460-341 FTG,PIPE BRS NIP HEX 1/8" 1.0
17 2314-61 SILENCER, HEADER RSP 1.0
18 2467-92 CAPLUG,TAPERED 18MM X 1 1.0
19 4121-160 VALVE,DIAPHRAGM GOYEN MODIFIED RSP 1.0


SPARE PARTS LIST
PART NO. 5193-23

S-NO.
DESCRIPTION: RCVR,S4-2424 4"PERF SSCSSL

1 4127-242 PLENUM ASSY,2424 PERF PEL SSMC 1.0

2 4127-200 AIR VLV ASSY,S3 RCVR W/CTRL 4" SUB 1.0
3 2451-56 CLP, V-BAND RSP 1.0
4 3307-67 GAS,2422 4" OD RCVR PERF PEL RSP 1.0
5 4127-184 RET, 2424 PERF PELLET ST.STEEL 1.0
6 4127-202 BODY ASSY,RCVR 2424 SSMC 1.0
7 3428-45 GATE, 10" DISCHARGE SS 1.0
10 3307-65 GAS,DISCHARGE 2423 &2424 RCVR RSP 1.0
11 3307-66 GAS,INLET 2424 RCVR RSP 1.0
15 3428-46 GATE, 4"INLET 2400 SS RSP 1.0
16 2430-24 PIN,CLEVIS 3/16"X3" LG SS 1.0
17 2423-80 WASHER, FLAT #10 NYLON 2.0
18 2429-20 PIN,COTTER SS 1/16" X 3/4"LG 1.0
19 2109-66 CBL, 1.5 MTR BLACK CNCTRS 1.0
22 5741-93 SERIES 4 2400 RCVR PANEL RSP 1.0
23 2113-78 CAP, NYLON MALE CLOSURE 3.0
24 2109-71 CNCTR,4 PIN DIN W/MALE THREADS 1.0


SPARE PARTS LIST
PART NO. 5158-47AM

S-NO.
DESCRIPTION: BLWR,VAC-PAC 25HP 6ML 596 CFM

1 2301-35 BLOWER 6MR-LHC 1.0

2 4218-14 ADAPTER PLATE,BLWR BASE 6ML 1.0
3 2454-1 RUB,SHT ISOLATIONPAD18X18X5/16 76.0
8 5309-141 VLV,VAC-BRKR 5" COMPLT ASSY SUB 1.0
12 2120-14 MTR,HO TEFC 25HP 1800RPM 284T 1.0
13 2118-7 BASE,MTR ADJ 1.0
18 4218-11 BASE,BLWR STYLE 2 4500 SERIES 1.0
19 4219-36 GUARD,DRIVE 2 BASE 6M-25/30HP 1.0
20 3119-131 BRKT,DRIVE GUARD SLIDE PLATE 2.0
21 4219-30 GUARD,DRIVE SLIDE PLATE 4500 1.0
29 4308-173 BLWR ADP,VAC-PAC DISC 5"PX5"P 1.0
30 2450-38 CLAMP, 2 BOLT 2.0
31 2310-332 HOSE,RUB 5-9/16"ID 3.0
32 4308-77 ADP,BLWR VAC-PAC RFVLV 5"PX2"P 1.0
34 2315-20 VALVE,RELIEF VAC 2" 215V-H RSP 1.0
35 2311-181 CPLG,COMP 5"PIPE 4-BOLT 1.0
36 5302-166 RED,S 5"P TO 4"OD 1.0
37 3119-130 BRKT,STYLE 2 BASE LIFTING LEG 2.0
43 2319-3 SNUBBER,PRESS 1/4NPT 1.0
44 2460-41 FTG,PIPE BRS EL STRE 90 1/4" 1.0
45 2310-42 TUBE,PLASTIC 1/4"OD .033WL IE 36.0
46 3121-62 BRKT,BLWR GA MT PRES VAC 1.0
47 2318-4 GA,VAC 0-30HG/0-1000 MBAR RSP 1.0
50 2422-1 GROMMET,RUB LORD 3.0
61 3102-24 BRACE,BLOWER DRIVE GUARD 1.0
62 2205-100 BELT,BANDED 5VX-630 2-BAND RSP 1.0
63 2204-170 SHEAVE,TLB 5V 2GR 8.0 OD 1.0
64 2217-17 BUSHING,TLB 2517 X 1-7/8" BORE 1.0
65 2204-169 SHEAVE,TLB 5V 2GR 7.5 OD 1.0
66 2217-14 BUSHING,TLB 2517 X 1-3/8" BORE 1.0


SPARE PARTS LIST
PART NO. 5121-7

S-NO.
DESCRIPTION: GATE,SLIDE 12" SQ AL

1 3414-3 WHEEL,SLIDE GT MA 9-1/2"AL 1.0

2 2616-72 GAS,SQ NPRN WH 12"TANK GATE 1.0
3 2516-3 BRG,FLG BRZ 3/4IDX7/8ODX3/4LG 1.0
4 2514-1 BRG,BRZ 3/4ID X 1-1/2OD X1/8TI 1.0


SPARE PARTS LIST
PART NO. 4127-206

S-NO.
DESCRIPTION: HOP,RCVR ACCESS W/OPENING304SS

4 2313-243 COV,FIL 8-1/2" X 15" 12 OZ RSP 1.0
Notes: RSP – Item is a recommended spare part.

SUB – Item is a subassembly. Parts information is on a following page or in a separate section of
this manuals as specified in the manual index.

SPARE PARTS LIST
PART NO. 4127-200

S-NO.
DESCRIPTION: AIR VLV ASSY,S3 RCVR W/CTRL 4"

1 3410-141 HSG, CONTROL VALVE 4" 1.0

3 2460-362 FTG,PIPE S NIPHEX 1/8"X1.75"LG 1.0
4 2311-186 EL,1/8"NPT X1/4"OD PLASTIC 3.0
5 2310-336 TUBE,PARFLEX 1/4"OD .032WL 6.5
6 2313-167 MUFFLER,1/8"NPT EXHAUST VENT RSP 2.0
7 2320-49 CYL,AIR1-1/2"BOREX5"STRK DUAL RSP 1.0
8 2423-86 WASHER, LASERCUT 4"SS RETAINER RSP 1.0
9 3417-140 FLAP, CONTROL VALVE 4" RSP 1.0
10 3305-249 RET,4"AIR CONT VLV WASHER RSP 1.0
12 2420-41 NUT,HEX PLTD NYL LOCK 7/16"-20 1.0
13 2453-538 STICKER,DO NOT LIFT REC BY CYL 1.0
111 2424-54 SHIM,BRS.03THK .765IDX1.499"OD RSP 1.0
112 2424-55 SHIM,BRS.01THK .765IDX1.499"OD RSP 1.0
113 2424-56 SHM,BRS.005THK .635IDX1.499"OD RSP 1.0


Medium Voltage Motor Solutions
Medium Voltage Motor
North American Headquarters and Manufacturing Facility (Houston, TX)

G7 Drive
TOSHIBA — Quality by Design

Toshiba’s culture and history are strongly rooted in quality. Our designs are
technologically innovative, and our products are manufactured from start to end
using only the highest quality domestic and foreign parts.
Product Warranty
Toshiba offers a comprehensive warranty program on its full line of industrial
products. Consult your salesperson or the factory for specific information.
Need to Know More?

Be sure to visit our website located at www.toshiba.com/ind for the latest
information on Toshiba products and services.
Customer Support Services

Toshiba offers 24-hour service nationwide. For assistance of any type
call: 1-800-231-1412.
MOTORS ADJUSTABLE SPEED DRIVES CONTROLS UPS INSTRUMENTATION PLC
Available Through:
INDUSTRIAL DIVISION
13131 West Little York Road, Houston, Texas 77041
Tel 713/466-0277 Fax 713/466-8773
US 800/231-1412 Canada 800/872-2192 Mexico 01/800/527-1204
www.toshiba.com/ind
Copyright 06/2008 *MVMFAMBROC090626*
We Don’t Just Design Motors,
We Design Solutions
TIC produces a wide range of medium voltage motors ranging from 200 to 50,000 HP and 2300 to
13,800 V for countless industries and applications. In 1980 TIC began manufacturing motors in Houston,
Texas and since then has developed a proud tradition of producing some on the most reliable, robust
motors in the market. Combining our skilled engineering with our superior manufacturing, gives us the
ultimate flexibility to customize our products to meet customer needs. At Toshiba we don’t just design
motors, we design complete solutions.
Toshiba Value
We listen to what our customers say and focus on providing motor
solutions that exceed their needs and expectations. We continuously
enhance our designs and manufacturing processes to offer the best
value available.
• Energy Savings
Advanced Technology & Design for Maximum Efficiency
• Extended Motor Life
Low Vibration, Low Maintenance & Enhanced Cooling
• Low Noise
– Advanced Frame Construction to Reduce Electrical Noise Horizontal Induction Motors
– Cast Iron Frames Up to 5000 HP
• Reduced-Cycle Time
– Advanced Manufacturing Processes & Robotics
– Motors Up to 2000 HP can be Custom Manufactured in
Houston in 6-8 Weeks
– Stock Motors Available
• Reliability
– Conservative Engineering Designs for Specific Applications
– Zero Defects Quality Control Program
Vertical Induction Motors
Capabilities
• Worldwide Manufacturing Up to 30,000 HP for Induction Motors/Generators
• 50,000 HP for Synchronous Motors/Generators
• Complete Range of Enclosures: Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled (TEFC), Air-to-Air Cooled (TEAAC),
Water-to-Air Cooled (TEWAC), Totally Enclosed Force-Ventilated (TEFV), Open Drip Proof (ODP),
Weather Protected (WP1 & WP2)
• Voltage Up to 13,800 V
• Vertical & Horizontal Mounting
• Squirrel Cage & Wound Rotor Induction Motors
• Synchronous Motors
Designed & Built Typical Voltage Ranges for
for Virtually Any Application Induction & Synchronous Motors
We offer a complete range of features and services for

worldwide markets and applications. 2000 V through 3300 V
Supply Voltage
• Manufactured to Meet Worldwide Standards
(NEMA, IEC, BS, AS)
4000 V through 6600 V
• Latest Edition to API 541, 546 & 547 General &
Special Purpose
• Two-Pole Stiff Shaft (Designed for Adjustable 10000 V through 13800 V
Speed Applications - e.g. Pipelines)
• High Inertia Applications
• Two-Speed, Pole Amplitude Modulated ODP Cast
(PAM) Motors Iron Frame
• Fabricated Copper & State-of-the-Art Low Pressure

Die Cast Aluminum Rotor Designs
ODP Cast Iron Frame and/or
• Self-Lubricated Sleeve Bearing Capability up to Fabricated Frame Top-Hat Construction
4500 HP at 3600 RPM
• ISO 9001 Certification in All Manufacturing Facilities TEFC Cast Iron
Types of Motor Enclosures

• TOSTIGHT II Advanced Mica Insulation System with Micro-Processed Controlled Epoxy VPI Fin-Type Frame
• Complete Range of Accessories & Motor-Protection Devices

• Full Testing Capabilities (IEEE, JEC) Incorporating Temperature, Efficiency, Vibration & Noise
TEAAC Cast Iron and/or Fabricated
(Complete API 541 Testing Also Available) Frame Top-Hat Contstruction
• Worldwide Authorized Service Facilities
• Adjustable Frequency Drive Compatibility with Extended Warranty on Toshiba Motor & Drive Systems
TEAAC Wound Rotor
• Electronic Data & Software
• Field & Trouble-Shooting Services Available 24/7
NEMA WP2 Cast Iron and/or Fabricated Frame
Top-Hat Construction
Applications & Markets
• Pipeline - Pumps & Compressors
TEWAC Fabricated Frame Top-Hat Construction
• Pulp & Paper - Refiners, Vacuum Pumps, Chippers, Hoggers
• Mining & Aggregate - Ball Mills, Grinders, Crushers, Slurry Pumps, Conveyors
• Utilities - Pulverizers, Fans, Vertical & Horizontal Pumps
• Petro-Chemical - API, Low & High Speed Compressors, Various Pumps
100
500
00
00
00
00
100
300
500
100
200
300
500
• Water/Wastewater - Large Vertical High Thrust & Horizontal Pumps (Synchronous & Induction)
• Special Applications - Car & Metal Shredders, Banbury Mixers Motor Capacity in HP
Medium Voltage Motor Enclosures
Cooled Fin-Type
NEMA Weather Protected Type I Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled (TEFC)
An open drip-proof motor (IP22, IC01) is a common A totally-enclosed fan-cooled motor (IP54, IC611) is
choice for a large, well-ventilated room. Fresh air is generally used in an environment containing corrosive
pulled in through the air housing's intakes by a high- or harmful gas.
performance fan, which cools the motor's core and coils. The external fan is mounted on the opposite drive
The hot air is then exhausted from the side openings. directing fresh air into the air housing's pipes located on
The air housing's intakes and exhaust openings contain the upper part of the motor. The pipes act as a heat
louvers and wire meshes which prevent the intrusion exchanger. Cool air passing through the pipes expels
of water drips and other foreign matter into the motor hot internal air from the motor.
(meets NEMA WP1 requirements). This motor can be used outdoors. Cooling tubes within
Additional rainproof louvers can be provided on the air the air housing are easily accessible and cleaned simply
intake and exhaust openings (IP23, IC01) for an outdoor by removing the fan cover.
motor or an outdoor rainproof motor. Air-to-Air Cooled
Type (TEAAC)
Indoor Top-Hat
Construction A Solution For
Every Application
Fundamental Construction
A modular frame allows for flexibility
in top-hat design for all environmental
conditions.
Outdoor
Severe
Atmosphere
NEMA Weather Protected Type II Totally Enclosed Water-to-Air Cooled

This open drip outdoor motor (IP24W, IC01) is designed The totally enclosed water-to-air cooled motor (IP54,
for outdoor use and incorporates an air housing in IC81W) is especially useful in locations where low noise
accordance with NEMA, WP2. It includes three right- operation is required or where removing heat from the
angled turns for air inlets and outlets. The inlet air duct motor is required.
has a section where wind velocity falls below 3 m/sec The motor accommodates a water-to-air exchanger in
(600 ft/min), causing dripping water, dust, and foreign the air housing which is located in the upper part of the
matter to fall before air reaches the motor's electrical motor. Water passing through the heat exchanger effi-
parts. ciently cools air circulating in the motor.
A section is provided in which air may blow through A drain in the air housing protects the motor proper from
without being forced into the motor. Inlet air filters can be damage caused by water leakage from the air cooler. Quiet
provided to prevent the ingress of particulate material. Leakage alarm detectors are also available. Operation
Selecting the Degree of Protection and Cooling Method
Indoor Use
Ordinary
IP22, IC01
Cooling Air from Outside the Room *1
Standard / Clean Atmosphere
IP22, IC11 ODP, NEMA - WP1

Exhaust Air to Outside
IP22, IC21
Inlet Air from Outside and
Exhaust Air to Outside
IP54, IC31
With Dripping Water
IP23, IC01
NEMA - WP2
With Splashing Water
Outdoor Use
IP24, IC01
IP24W, IC01
*1. Construction of the motor can be modified to another

degree of protection by changing the top-hat configuration.
TEFC (CACA)
Contaminated / Harmful Atmosphere
Outdoor and Indoor
IP54, IC611
Severe Atmospheric Conditions

with Blowing Dust IP55, IC611 *1
TEWAC (CACW)
Quiet Operation and
Using Water for Coolant
IP54, IC81W
Exposed to Rainfall IP55, IC81W

*1
Medium Voltage Motor
Frame Sizes
Typical HP
Number of
Frame Available Enclosures Est. Wt. (lb.) D 2E 2F A B (Based on 1800
Poles
RPM)
445TS 2 ODP/WP1 1450 11 18 16.5 22.05 19.29 200
445T 4 ODP/WP1 1600 11 18 16.5 22.05 19.29 200
447TS 4 ODP/WP1 2110 11 18 20 22.05 22.83 250
N449TS 2, 4, 6, 8 TEFC 3800 11 18 25 22.05 34.70 350
505US 4, 6 ODP/WP1 2310 12.5 20 18 25.00 20.87 350
505USS 2 ODP/WP1 2100 12.5 20 18 25.00 20.87 300
507US 4, 6 ODP/WP1 2750 12.5 20 22 25.00 24.80 400
507USS 2 ODP/WP1 2350 12.5 20 22 25.00 24.80 350
509US 4, 6, 8 ODP/WP1 3000 12.5 20 28 25.00 30.79 500
509USS 2 ODP/WP1 2810 12.5 20 28 25.00 30.79 500
5010US 4, 6, 8 TEFC, ODP, WP1, WP2 4500 12.5 20 32 24.80 39.80 450
5010USS 2 TEFC, ODP, WP1, WP2 4500 12.5 20 32 24.80 39.80 350
5010/11/12US 4, 6, 8 ODP, WP1, WP2 5000 12.5 20 36 29.50 49.10 700
5010/11/12USS 2 ODP, WP1, WP2 5000 12.5 20 40 29.50 49.10 800
5809US 4, 6, 8 TEFC 6500 14.5 23 32 28.00 42.10 800
5810US 4, 6, 8 TEFC, ODP, WP1, WP2, TEAAC 6500 14.5 23 36 28.00 42.10 800
5810USS 2 TEFC, ODP, WP1, WP2, TEAAC 6500 14.5 23 36 28.00 42.10 600
5810/11/12US 4, 6, 8 ODP, WP1, WP2, TEAAC 8000 14.5 23 40 29.53 53.74 1500
5810/11/12USS 2 ODP, WP1, WP2, TEAAC 8000 14.5 23 45 29.53 53.74 2000
315-1000 2 and up ODP, WP1, WP2, TEAAC 6200 12.40 24.80 39.37 29.53 49.09 700
450-1250 2 and up ODP, WP1, WP2, TEAAC, TEWAC 13880 17.72 35.43 49.21 41.34 67.95 3000
Please contact Toshiba for larger or more detailed frame dimensions.
Toshiba Metric Frame Designations
X X X - X X X X
• First Three Numerals = Shaft Height in mm

• Last Four Numerals = 2F Dimension in mm
e.g. 450 through 1250 Frame = 450 mm Shaft Height D Dimension & 1250 mm (2F) Dimension
NEMA Frame Designations
X X X X
$
• First Two Numerals = Four x D Dimension in Inches
• Last One or Two Numerals are Obtained from Numbering System & %
• 2F Dimension, as Defined in NEMA MG 1 Section 4.2
" !
INDEX MDS-O-0001
TOSHIBA INTERNATIONAL CORPORATION
SHEET NO. 1 of 3
Industrial Division / Houston Motor Plant
ISSUED 01/24/96
SUPERSEDES NEW
Motor Operation Procedure
REVISION 0
REFERENCE USE ONLY WHEN ISSUED BY MOTOR MKTG. WRITTEN BY I. MARQUEZ
APPROVED BY J. Bugbee
Motor Lubrication
Dist: Mktg.
QC 1. SCOPE
To give recommended guidelines for electric motor relubrication.
2. START UP
Toshiba motors are properly greased at the time of manufacture. It is recommended that
if a motor has been stored for a period of six months or more, it should be lubricated prior
to starting (See Fig. 1) using a standard hand held grease gun.
Fig. 1 FRAME SIZE QUANTITY of PUMPS

143 ~ 256 2 to 3 strokes
284 ~ 405 4 to 5 strokes
444 and Larger 6 to 10 strokes
It should be noted that grease leakage around the shaft hole could indicated over-
packing. Excess grease should be purged out by operating the motor temporarily with
the relief open.
Lubrication of electric motors should be done as a part of a planned maintenance

program.
Before greasing, be sure fittings are clean and free from dirt. Always relubricate using
grease that is fresh and free from contamination.
Toshiba motors may be equipped with an automatic grease relief fitting, grease plug or
grease cover plate for the outlet.
It should be noted that it may be necessary to remove an automatic type fitting due to
hardening of grease. Motors utilizing a grease plate may require the scraping out of old
grease a minimum of once every two years.
3. STANDARD SERVICE
1. Select the proper service condition from Fig. 2.
2. Select the frequency and volume from Fig. 3.
3. Before greasing be sure fittings are clean and free from dirt.
INDEX MDS-O-0001
SHEET NO. 2 of 3
ISSUED 01/24/96
SUPERSEDES NEW
3. STANDARD SERVICE (-cont.)
5. Remove relief plug or plate and using a low pressure hand held grease gun, pump the required
amount of grease.
6. For Frames 143T to 365T allow motor to run for 20 to 30 minutes and for Frames 405T and
larger allow motor to run for 30 to 60 minutes before replacing hardware.
7. Grease may not relieve from drain. Use volumes recommended to avoid overgreasing.
Fig. 2 SERVICE CONDITIONS

Standard Duty Eight hours per day;
Light to normal loading;
Clean condition, free from dust.
Severe Duty 24 hours per day;

Light to normal shock loading, vibration;
Exposure to dirt or dusty conditions.
Very Severe Duty 24 hours per day;

High ambient;
Normal to high shock loading, vibration;
Dusty conditions;
Confined mounting conditions
4. RECOMMENDED GREASES:
Confirm if the motor nameplate has specified the grease used.
Standard, Severe Duty and 841 motors greased at the factory will use:
Grease Name: Chevron SRI
Manufactured By: Chevron U.S.A., Inc.
Operating Ambient Temp.: -30°C to 50°C
5. RECOMMENDED GREASES for STANDARD APPLICATIONS
Use the following greases listed for the given temperature range, unless otherwise shown by the motors
grease nameplate:
Operating Ambient Temp. -30°C to 50°C

Chevron SRI Chevron U.S.A., Inc.
Exxon Unirex #2 Exxon Corp.
Exxon Polyrex Exxon Corp.
Shell Dolium R Shell Oil Co.
Polystar RB 2 Texaco
INDEX MDS-O-0001
SHEET NO. 3 of 3
ISSUED 01/24/96
SUPERSEDES NEW
Fig. 3 TYPE OF SERVICE
SYNC. RPM FRAME SIZE STANDARD SEVERE VERY SEVERE

RANGE DUTY DUTY DUTY
3600 143T-256T 8 Mos. 4 Mos. 1 Mo.
1800 ~ 900 143T-256T 30 Mos. 12 Mos. 4 Mos.
Bearing Size Periodic Grease Amount
6205/6206 3 Grams
6207/6208/6305 5 Grams
6306 10 Grams
6308/6309 20 Grams
3600 284T-365T 8 Mos. 4 Mos. 1 Mo.
1800 ~ 900 284T-365T 24 Mos. 12 Mos. 4 Mos.
6211 10 Grams
6309 20 Grams
6310/6312 30 Grams
6314 50 Grams
3600 404T-447T 8 Mos. 4 Mos. 1 Mo.
1800 ~ 900 404T-447T 18 Mos. 8 Mos. 3 Mos.
6216 20 Grams
6313/NU317 30 Grams
NU318/NU320 50 Grams
6317/6318 80 Grams
6320/6322/6324 80 Grams
NOTES:
1. When relubricating roller bearings divide the monthly service time by two.
2. See Fig. 2 for definitions of Service Conditions.
3. Gram quantity when using a typical low pressure hand grease gun equals
(4 pumps = 5 grams)
6. RECOMMENDED GREASES FOR SPECIAL APPLICATIONS
The following greases are recommended for special applicaitons only and should be used only for motors
specifically built for such conditions.
Minimum Ambient Temp. -60°C

Beacon 325 Exxon Corp.
Maximum Ambient Temp. 90°C
DOW Corning 44 DOW Corning Corp.
Exxon Unirex S2 Exxon Corp.
WARNING: In general it is not recommend to mix greases of different brands. The mixing of different types of thickeners may destroy the
composition and physical properties of the grease. In the event that a different grease is required by the end user, the following steps can
be taken. Using the instructions for lubrication, open grease outlet and purge the system as much as possible of the old or unwanted
grease. Repeat this same operation after 1 week of service. Consult TOSHIBA/HOUSTON Engineering for further recommendations on
grease compatibility.
13131 W. Little York Rd.
Houston, Texas 77041
Phone: 713-466-0277
Fax: 713-466-8773
STORAGE INSTRUCTIONS
Short Term Storage

If the equipment is not put into immediate use it should be stored in a clean, dry location.
Care should be taken to keep the equipment covered when moving from a cold location
to a warm location, otherwise condensation may occur. If condensation does occur, and
the equipment is moist, allow it to dry thoroughly before applying power.
Long Term Storage

1. Cover machined metal parts with weatherproof cover, but leave ventilating area
exposed.
2. Make certain unpainted portions are covered and retouch any scratches or flaked
areas.
3. If condensate plugs or drain plugs have been used, make sure they are operative.
4. Cover completely with plastic cover and insert silica-gel bags inside the cover for
moisture control.
5. If motor is equipped with space heaters make sure space heaters are properly
connected and operative. The motor interior temperature should be maintained
approximately 5.6º C ( 10º F) above ambient.
6. A systematic inspection and maintenance schedule should be established. If rotating

apparatus is to be stored for 6 months or longer, it should, in addition to the minor
precautions above, be given a megger test every 3 to 6 months. A minimum reading
of 10 megohoms is recommended. A record of insulation values, temperature, time,
humidity and length of voltage application should be recorded to show winding
conditions prior to start up.
7. If windings are designed for outdoor operation, they will not be affected by extreme
or sudden temperature changes or inclement weather in general. However a weather
proof cover with provisions for adequate ventilation should be used to guard against
intrusion of salt, dust, or other abrasive or corrosive material.
8. It is recommended that the rotor be turned every month to redistribute the lubricant in
the bearings and oil or grease be added every 6 six months.
9. Preferably, storage would be in a warehouse or enclosed building but the same

precautions should be followed.
N587UZ
447TZ
Proof.
ventilation)
power.
needed.
V50 ... V53 Series
® ®
3/2, 5/2 and 5/3 Spool valves
Solenoid actuated and air pilot operated
1/8 ... 1/2
High flow in-line valves

Compact and robust design
Low power energy efficient solenoids
Very high cycle life
Flexible in-line and fixed length manifold
mounting options
Technical data
Connections:
1/8", 1/4", 3/8", and 1/2" NPT and ISO G
Medium:
Compressed air, filtered to 40 µm, Ordering information
lubricated or non-lubricated
See page 3 (solenoid actuated valves) and
Operation: 4 (pneumatic actuated valves)
Softseal spool valve, solenoid and air pilot actuated
Mounting:
In-line or fixed length manifold
Operating pressure:
116 psi (8 bar)
Flow Characteristics:
Size Function l/min Cv
1/8 3/2 & 5/2 480 0.48
1/8 5/3 270 0.27
1/4 3/2 & 5/2 1020 1.02
1/4 5/3 755 0.75
3/8 3/2 & 5/2 1705 1.70
3/8 5/3 1190 1.19
1/2 3/2 & 5/2 2480 2.48
1/2 5/3 1910 1.91
Ambient & medium temperature:
23°F to 140°F (-5°C to 60°C) pilot models
23°F to 122°F (-5°C to 50°C) solenoid models
3/2 5/2
(consult our Technical Service for use below 36°F (2°C)
Materials
Body/sub-base: die-cast aluminum alloy or aluminum alloy
Softseal spool: NBR/aluminum alloy
Mounting sheets/screws: steel 5/3 APB 5/3 COE
Springs: stainless steel 4 2
14 1
5 1 3
5/3 COP
Our policy is one of continued research and development. We therefore reserve the right to amend,
10/09 without notice, the specifications given in this document. N/US 5.3.541.01
V50 ... V53 Series ® ®
Solenoid actuated valves

Symbol Model Function Actuation Pilot supply Operating Flow Manual Weight Drawing
pressure (Cv) override (lb) No.
(psi)
2 V50P413AA2* 3/2 NC Solenoid Internal 29 to 116 0.48 Push & turn 0.26 1
12 10
3 1
2 V51R417AA2* 3/2 NC Solenoid/spring Internal 29 to 116 1.02 Push & turn 0.45 2
12 10
V52S417AA2* 3/2 NC Solenoid/spring Internal 29 to 116 1.70 Push & turn 0.77 2
3 1 V53T417AA2* 3/2 NC Solenoid/spring Internal 29 to 116 2.48 Push & turn 0.79 2
2
V50P411AA2* 3/2 Solenoid/solenoid Internal 29 to 116 0.48 Push & turn 0.38 3
12 10
V51R411AA2* 3/2 Solenoid/solenoid Internal 29 to 116 1.02 Push & turn 0.65 4
3 1
V52S411AA2* 3/2 Solenoid/solenoid Internal 29 to 116 1.70 Push & turn 0.97 4
V53T411AA2* 3/2 Solenoid/solenoid Internal 29 to 116 2.48 Push & turn 0.96 4
4 2
V50P513AA2* 5/2 Solenoid/air Internal 29 to 116 0.48 Push & turn 0.27 5
14 12
5 1 3
4 2
12
V51R517AA2* 5/2 Solenoid/spring Internal 29 to 116 1.02 Push & turn 0.41 6.
14
V52S517AA2* 5/2 Solenoid/spring Internal 29 to 116 170 Push & turn 0.65 6
5 3
1 V53T517AA2* 5/2 Solenoid/spring Internal 29 to 116 2.48 Push & turn 0.67 6
4 2 V50P511AA2* 5/2 Solenoid/solenoid Internal 29 to 116 0.48 Push & turn 0.39 7
14 12
V51R511AA2* 5/2 Solenoid/solenoid Internal 29 to 116 1.02 Push & turn 0.64 8
5 1 3
V52S511AA2* 5/2 Solenoid/solenoid Internal 29 to 116 1.70 Push & turn 1.0 8
V53T511AA2* 5/2 Solenoid/solenoid Internal 29 to 116 2.48 Push & turn 0.42 8
4 2 V50P611AA2* 5/3 APB Solenoid/solenoid Internal 44 to 116 0.27 Push & turn 0.75 9
14 12
V51R611AA2* 5/3 APB Solenoid/solenoid Internal 44 to 116 0.75 Push & turn 0.85 10
5
1
3 V52S611AA2* 5/3 APB Solenoid/solenoid Internal 44 to 116 1.19 Push & turn 1.25 11
V53T611AA2* 5/3 APB Solenoid/solenoid Internal 44 to 116 1.91 Push & turn 1.40 11
4 2 V50P711AA2* 5/3 COE Solenoid/solenoid Internal 44 to 116 0.27 Push & turn 0.75 9
14 12
V51R711AA2* 5/3 COE Solenoid/solenoid Internal 44 to 116 0.75 Push & turn 0.85 10
5
1
3 V52S711AA2* 5/3 COE Solenoid/solenoid Internal 44 to 116 1.19 Push & turn 1.25 11
V53T711AA2* 5/3 COE Solenoid/solenoid Internal 44 to 116 1.91 Push & turn 1.40 11
1 2 V50P811AA2* 5/3 COP Solenoid/solenoid Internal 44 to 116 0.27 Push & turn 0.75 9
14 12
V51R811AA2* 5/3 COP Solenoid/solenoid Internal 44 to 116 0.75 Push & turn 0.85 10
5
1
3 V52S811AA2* 5/3 COP Solenoid/solenoid Internal 44 to 116 1.19 Push & turn 1.25 11
V53T811AA2* 5/3 COP Solenoid/solenoid Internal 44 to 116 1.91 Push & turn 1.40 11
* Insert coil code from below tables

APB = All Ports Blocked, COE = Center Open Exhaust, COP = Center Open Pressure.
V50 series only V51 ... V53 series
Voltage codes and spare solenoid kits Voltage codes and spare solenoid kits
Power Solenoid Kit Power Solenoid Kit
Voltage Code Inrush/hold Model Voltage Code Inrush/hold Model
12 V d.c. 12A 2.5 W V12958-A12 12 V d.c. 12J 2.0 W 54469-01
24 V d.c. 13A 2.5 W V12958-A13 24 V d.c. 13J 2.0 W 54469-02
110/120 V a.c. 50/60 Hz 18A 3.7/3.1 VA V12958-A18 110/120 V a.c. 50/60 Hz 18J 4.0/2.5 VA 54469-03
Electrical details for V50 Electrical details for V51 to V53

solenoid operators solenoid operators
Voltage tolerances +/- 10% Voltage tolerances +/- 10%
Rating 100 % Continuous duty Rating 100 % Continuous duty
Inlet orifice 0.8 mm Inlet orifice 0.8 mm
Materials PPS (body, FKM and NBR (seal) Materials PPS (body), FKM and NBR (seal)
Insulation class F class Insulation class F class
Connector type DIN 43650 Table “C” Connector type 22 mm industrial standard
Protection class IP65 (with sealed plugs) Protection class IP65 (with sealed plugs)
N/US 5.3.541.02 Our policy is one of continued research and development. We therefore reserve the right to amend,
without notice, the specifications given in this document.
10/09
V50 ... V53 Series ® ®
Solenoid Valve Options selector

V5˙˙˙1˙A A2˙˙˙ ˙
Thread size Substitute Connectors, 15 mm, DIN 43650, Form ‘C’ Substitute
No connector A
1/8" 0
0 to 240 V a.c./d.c. w/ cable grip B
1/4" 1
0 to 240 V a.c./d.c. w/ 6 ft.molded cable C
3/8" 2
12 to 24 Vac/Vdc w/indicator light and cable grip H
1/2" 3
120 Vac/Vdc w/indicator light and cable grip J
Connectors, 22 mm industrial standard Substitute
Thread type Substitute No connector A
1/8 NPT P 0 to 240 V a.c./d.c. B
1/4 NPT R 0 to 240 V a.c./d.c., 6 ft. [1m] molded cable C
3/8 NPT S 12 to 24 Vac/Vdc w/indicator light and cable grip H
1/2 NPT T 120 Vac/Vdc w/indicator light and cable grip J
G 1/8 A
G 1/4 B
G 3/8 C Voltage (V50 valve series) Substitute
G 1/2 D 12 V d.c 2.5 W 12A
24 V d.c 2.5 W 13A
110/120 V a.c (50/60 Hz) 3.7/3.2 VA 18A
Voltage (V51 ... V53 valve series) Substitute

Ordering example 12 V d.c 2.0 W 12J
To order a 5/2 solenoid valve, 1/4 NPT ports, 24 V d.c 2.0 W 13J
spring return, 24 V d.c., with DIN connector. 110/120 V a.c (50/60 Hz) 4.0/2.5 VA 18J
quote: V51R517AA213JB
Actuation Substitute
Solenoid/Air spring* 3
Solenoid/Spring 7
Solenoid/Solenoid 1
* V50 Series only
Function Substitute
3/2 Normally closed 4
5/2 5
5/3 All ports blocked 6
5/3 Center open exhaust 7
5/3 Center open pressure 8
10/09
V50 ... V53 Series
® ®
Pilot actuated valves

Symbol Model Function Pilot Mid Return Operating Pilot Flow Weight Drawing
position pressure pressure (Cv) (lb) No.
(psi) (psi)
2
12 10
V50P4D3AXP0900 3/2 Air Air spring 0 to 116 22 to 116 0.48 0.13 12

3 1
12
2
10
V51R4D3AXP0900 3/2 Air Spring 0 to 116 22 to 116 1.02 0.27 13
V52S4D7AXP0900 3/2 Air Spring 0 to 116 29 to 116 1.70 0.65 13
3 1
V53T4D7AXP0900 3/2 Air Spring 0 to 116 29 to 116 2.48 0.66 13
2
12 10
V50P4DDAXP0200 3/2 Air Air 0 to 116 22 to 116 0.48 0.16 14
V51R4DDAXP0200 3/2 Air Air 0 to 116 22 to 116 1.02 0.30 15
3 1
V52S4DDAXP0200 3/2 Air Air 0 to 116 29 to 116 1.70 0.71 15
V53T4DDAXP0200 3/2 Air Air 0 to 116 29 to 116 2.48 0.72 15
4 2
14 12
V50P5D3AXP0900 5/2 Air Air spring 0 to 116 22 to 116 0.48 0.16 16

5 1 3
14
4 2
12
V51R5D7AXP0900 5/2 Air Spring 0 to 116 22 to 116 1.02 0.23 17
V52S5D7AXP0900 5/2 Air Spring 0 to 116 29 to 116 1.70 0.52 17
5 1 3
V53T5D7AXP0900 5/2 Air Spring 0 to 116 29 to 116 2.480 0.61 17
4 2
14 12
V50P5DDAXP0200 5/2 Air Air 0 to 116 22 to 116 0.48 0.19 18
V51R5DDAXP0200 5/2 Air Air 0 to 116 22 to 116 1.02 0.30 19
5 1 3
V52S5DDAXP0200 5/2 Air Air 0 to 116 29 to 116 1.70 0.52 19
V53T5DDAXP0200 5/2 Air Air 0 to 116 29 to 116 2.48 1.65 19
4 2 V50P6DDAXP0200 5/3 Air APB Air 0 to 116 22 to 116 0.27 ??? 20
14 12
V51R6DDAXP0200 5/3 Air APB Air 0 to 116 22 to 116 0.75 0.39 21
5 3
1 V52S6DDAXP0200 5/3 Air APB Air 0 to 116 29 to 116 1.19 0.66 22
V53T6DDAXP0200 5/3 Air APB Air 0 to 116 29 to 116 1.91 0.75 22
V50P7DDAXP0200 5/3 Air COE Air 0 to 116 22 to 116 0.27 ??? 20
4 2
14 12
V51R7DDAXP0200 5/3 Air COE Air 0 to 116 22 to 116 0.75 0.39 21
5 1 3 V52S7DDAXP0200 5/3 Air COE Air 0 to 116 29 to 116 1.19 0.66 22
V53T7DDAXP0200 5/3 Air COE Air 0 to 116 29 to 116 1.91 0.75 22
4 2 V50P8DDAXP0200 5/3 Air COP Air 0 to 116 22 to 116 0.27 ??? 20
14 12
V51R8DDAXP0200 5/3 Air COP Air 0 to 116 22 to 116 0.75 0.39 21
5 3
1
V52S8DDAXP0200 5/3 Air COP Air 0 to 116 29 to 116 1.19 0.66 22
V53T8DDAXP0200 5/3 Air COP Air 0 to 116 29 to 116 1.91 0.75 22
APB = All Ports Blocked, COE = Center Open Exhaust, COP = Center Open Pressure.
Air Pilot Valve Options selector

V5˙˙˙D˙A X˙0˙00
Thread size Substitute Return Substitute
1/8" 0 Double air pilot 0200
1/4" 1 Single air pilot 0900
3/8" 2 Pilot port thread Substitute
1/2" 3 1/8 NPT P
Thread type Substitute G 1/8 A
1/8 NPT P
1/4 NPT R Pilot Substitute
3/8 NPT S Solenoid/Air spring* 3
1/2 NPT T Single air 7
G 1/8 A Double air D
G 1/4 B Function Substitute
G 3/8 C 3/2 Normally closed 4
G 1/2 D 5/2 5
5/3 All ports blocked 6
5/3 Center open exhaust 7
5/3 Center open pressure 8
* V50 Series only
Ordering example
To order a 5/2 valve, 3/8 NPT ports, air pilot,
spring return
quote: V52S5D7A-XA0900
10/09 Our policy is one of continued research and development. We therefore reserve the right to amend,
N/US 5.3.541.04
V50 ... V53 Series
® ®
Manifold system and blanking plates

Manifold for 3 port valves Blanking plate for 3 port valves Manifold for 5 port valves Blanking plate for 5 port valves
For valve series NPT BSPP NPT BSPP

V50 V50P30* V50PA30* V500351 V50P50* V50PA50* V500551
V51 V51R30* V51RB30* V510351 V51R50* V51RB50* V510551
V52 V52S30* V52SC30* V520351 V52S50* V52SC50* V520551
V53 V53T30* V53TD30* V530351 V53T50* V53TD50* V530551
* Number of station 2 ... 9 for 2 ... 9 stations
Number of station 10 for 10 stations
Accessories Accessories
Connectors, 15 mm, DIN 43650, Form ‘C’ Connectors, 22 mm industrial standard
B = V10027-D00 (0 to 240 V a.c./d.c.) B = 54934-01 (0 to 240 V a.c./d.c.)

C = V10013-D03 (0 to 240 V a.c./d.c., 6 ft. molded cable) C = 54934-21 (0 to 240 V a.c./d.c., 6 ft. [1m] molded cable)
H = V10012-D13 (12 to 24 Vac/Vdc w/indicator light) H = 54934-08 (12 to 24 Vac/Vdc w/indicator light)
J = V10012-D18 (120 Vac/Vdc w/indicator light) J = 54934-02 (120 Vac/Vdc w/indicator light)
Accessories
Silencers plastic Silencers
sintered bronze
Valve series NPT BSP NPT BSP

V50 (1/8") C/S1 M/S1 MS001A T40C1800
V51 (1/4") C/S2 M/S2 MS002A T40C2800
V52 (3/8") C/S3 M/S3 MS003A T40C3800
V53 (1/2") C/S4 M/S4 MS004A T40C4800
Manifold series NPT BSP NPT BSP

V50 C/S2 M/S2 MS002A T40C2800
V51 C/S2 M/S2 MS002A T40C2800
V52 C/S3 M/S3 MS003A T40C3800
V53 C/S4 M/S4 MS004A T40C4800
N/US 5.3.541.05
V50 ... V53 Series ® ®
Dimensions in Inches
Valve dimensions
3/2 Single solenoid pilot valve, 3/2 Single solenoid pilot valve,
1/8" port 1/4"... 1/2" ports

Air Spring return Mechanical spring return
J J
X
2
2 L AC L AC
C AB
V D V
I
H
E
E
A
G
H
A
F
R P
F
G
R P
D B
3
3 C AB A
B
A
R R
Q 1 Q
1
S
S
W
W
T
U
U
T
P P
N AD N AD
M M
1 Manual override
(Push and Turn)
2 4-6 mm cable dia.
3 Solenoid rotates
2 x 180° (V50) 4 x 90° (V51...V53)
4 6-8 mm cable dia.
Series Drawing A AB AC AD B C D E F G H I J
V50 1 3.92 0.53 0.85 0.59 2.56 0.59 0.13 2.19 1.06 0.20 0.12 - 1/8“
V51 2 4.23 0.53 0.67 0.53 2.72 0.98 0.17 2.68 1.38 0.33 0.12 0.12 1/4“
V52 2 4.98 0.51 1.02 0.59 3.50 1.02 0.18 2.87 1.83 1.56 0.16 0.12 3/8“
V53 2 5.24 0.49 1.06 0.59 3.78 1.14 0.18 2.87 1.83 1.56 0.16 0.12 1/2“
Series Drawing L M N P Q R S T U V W X
V50 1 0.57 4.25 0.91 1/8" 0.13 0.24 0.04 0.51 0.71 1.16 0.63 0.02
V51 2 0.71 4.72 0.98 1/4" 0.13 0.24 0.08 0.67 0.89 1.02 0.87 -
V52 2 1.02 5.49 1.61 3/8" 0.18 0.31 - 0.91 1.18 1.61 0.87 -
V53 2 1.14 5.75 1.89 1/2" 0.17 0.31 0.10 0.91 1.18 1.59 0.87 -
10/09
V50 ... V53 Series
® ®
3/2 Double solenoid pilot valve, 3/2 Double solenoid pilot valve,
1/8" port 1/4"... 1/2" ports
J
J
X
2
2 AC L AC L
AB C
V V D
I
H
E
E
G
A A
H
F
F
G
R P R P
D B
3 AB C 3
A
B
A
R
1 Q 1 P
S
S
W
W
U
T
T
P Q
AD N R
M AD N
M
1 Manual override
(Push and Turn)
2 4-6 mm cable dia.
3 Solenoid rotates
2 x 180° (V50) 4 x 90° (V51...V53)
4 6-8 mm cable dia.
Series Drawing A AB AC AD B C D E F G H I J
V50 3 5.69 1.44 1.14 1.06 3.01 0.59 0.13 2.19 1.06 0.20 0.12 - 1/8"
V51 4 5.75 1.20 1.34 1.20 3.39 0.98 0.17 2.68 1.38 0.33 0.12 0.12 1/4"
V52 4 7.17 1.22 1.73 1.30 4.21 1.02 0.18 2.87 1.83 1.56 0.16 0.12 3/8"
V53 4 7.40 1.20 1.77 1.30 4.49 1.14 0.18 2.87 1.83 1.56 0.16 0.12 1/2"
Series Drawing L M N P Q R S T U V W X
V50 3 0.58 6.46 0.92 1/8" 0.13 0.24 0.04 0.52 0.72 1.42 0.64 0.02
V51 4 0.72 7.52 1.00 1/4" 0.13 0.24 0.08 0.68 0.90 1.72 0.88 -
V52 4 1.04 8.32 1.64 3/8" 0.18 0.32 - 0.92 1.20 2.38 0.88 -
V53 4 1.16 8.56 1.92 1/2" 0.17 0.32 0.10 0.92 1.20 2.34 0.88 -
N/US 5.3.541.07
V50 ... V53 Series ® ®
5/2 Single solenoid pilot valve, 5/2 Single solenoid pilot valve,
1/8" port 1/4"... 1/2" ports

Air spring return Mechanical spring return
J J
K 2 K
2
L L
V
V
I
H
E
E
H
B
G
B A
F
R2 P R1
F
R2 P R1
D D
G
3 3
C C
B B
A A
O
R R O
1 Q P
1 P Q
S
S
T
U
W
T
U
N N
M M
1 Manual override
(Push and Turn)
2 4-6 mm cable dia.
3 Solenoid rotates
2 x 180° (V50) 4 x 90° (V51...V53)
4 6-8 mm cable dia.
Series Drawing A B C D E F G H I J K L
V50 5 4.25 2.99 0.57 0.13 2.17 1.06 0.20 0.12 - 1/8" 1/8" 1.14
V51 6 4.55 3.19 0.79 0.17 2.64 1.38 0.28 0.12 0.12 1/4" 1/8" 1.42
V52 6 5.59 4.25 1.02 0.22 2.83 1.83 0.18 0.16 0.12 3/8" 3/8" 2.05
V53 6 6.18 4.72 1.14 0.18 2.87 1.83 0.28 0.16 0.12 1/2" 1/2" 2.28
Series Drawing M N O P Q R S T U V W
V50 5 4.72 1.34 0.63 1/8" 0.13 0.24 0.08 0.51 0.71 1.30 0.63
V51 6 5.12 1.50 0.83 1/4" 0.13 0.24 0.12 0.67 0.89 1.26 0.87
V52 6 6.14 0.51 1.18 3/8" 0.18 0.31 - 0.91 1.18 1.77 0.87
V53 6 6.69 2.83 1.10 1/2" 0.17 0.31 0.18 0.91 1.18 2.01 0.87
10/09
V50 ... V53 Series
® ®
1/8" port 1/4"... 1/2" ports

J J
K K
1 L 2
L
I
H
E
E
H
B A B A
F
R2 P R1 R2 P R1
D D
G
3 C 3
C
B B
A A
O
R R O
1 P Q 1 Q P
S
S
W
W
T
U
T
N N
M M
1 Manual override
(Push and Turn)
2 4-6 mm cable dia.
3 Solenoid rotates
2 x 180° (V50) 4 x 90° (V51...V53)
4 6-8 mm cable dia.
V50 7 6.06 3.43 0.57 0.13 2.17 1.06 0.20 0.12 - 1/8" 1/8" 1.14
V51 8 6.57 3.82 0.79 0.17 2.64 1.38 0.28 0.12 0.12 1/4" 1/8" 1.42
V52 8 7.64 4.96 1.02 0.22 2.83 1.83 0.18 0.16 0.12 3/8" 3/8" 2.05
V53 8 8.35 5.43 1.14 0.18 2.87 1.83 0.28 0.16 0.12 1/2" 1/2" 2.28
Series Drawing M N O P Q R S T U W
V50 7 6.89 1.34 0.63 1/8" 0.13 0.24 0.08 0.51 0.71 0.63
V51 8 7.80 1.50 0.83 1/4" 0.13 0.24 0.12 0.67 0.89 0.87
V52 8 8.74 0.51 1.18 3/8" 0.18 0.31 - 0.91 1.18 0.87
V53 8 9.37 2.83 1.10 1/2" 0.17 0.31 0.18 0.91 1.18 0.87
N/US 5.3.541.09
V50 ... V53 Series ® ®
1/8" port 1/4" ports

J J
K K
2 L 2 L
V
V
H
I
E
E
G
B A B A
H
F
F
R2 P R1 R2 P R1
D D
G
3 C 3
C
B B
A A
O
R R O
1 P Q 1 Q P
S
S
W
W
T
U
T
N N
M M
5/3 Double solenoid pilot valve,

3/8"and 1/2" ports
J 1 Manual override
(Push and Turn)
11 2 4-6 mm cable dia.
3 Solenoid rotates
2 x 180° (V50) 4 x 90° (V51...V53)
K
2 4 6-8 mm cable dia.
L
I
E
B A
H
F
R2 P R1
D
G
3
C
B
A
R O
1 Q P
S
W
U
T
N
M
V50 9 6.42 3.78 0.57 0.13 2.17 1.06 0.20 0.12 - 1/8" 1/8" 1.14
V51 10 7.40 4.69 0.79 0.17 2.64 1.38 0.28 0.12 0.12 1/4" 1/8" 1.42
V52 11 9.61 7.07 1.02 0.22 2.83 1.83 0.18 0.16 0.12 3/8" 3/8" 2.05
V53 11 10.45 7.54 1.14 0.18 2.87 1.83 0.28 0.16 0.12 1/2" 1/2" 2.28
Series Drawing M N O P Q R S T U V W
V50 9 7.24 1.34 0.63 1/8" 0.13 0.24 0.08 0.51 0.71 1.71 0.63
V51 10 8.62 1.50 0.83 1/4" 0.13 0.24 0.12 0.67 0.89 1.91 0.87
V52 11 10.83 0.51 1.18 3/8" 0.18 0.31 #VALUE! 0.91 1.18 - 0.87
V53 11 11.48 2.83 1.10 1/2" 0.17 0.31 0.18 0.91 1.18 - 0.87
N/us 5.3.541.10 Our policy is one of continued research and development. We therefore reserve the right to amend,
10/09
V50 ... V53 Series
® ®
3/2 Single air pilot valve, 3/2 Single air pilot valve,
1/8" port 1/4"... 1/2" ports
12 J 13 J
X
L AC L AC
C AB
D
H
H
G
G
Y
Y
F
R P
F
R P
Z
Z
D
C AB
V V
R R
Q Q
S
S
T
U
T
P P
N AD N AD
B B
Series Drawing AB AC AD B C D F G H J L
V50 12 0.53 0.85 0.59 2.44 0.59 0.13 1.06 0.20 0.12 1/8" 0.57
V51 13 0.53 0.67 0.53 2.58 0.98 0.17 1.38 0.33 0.12 1/4" 0.71
V52 13 0.51 1.02 0.59 3.43 1.02 0.18 1.83 1.56 0.16 3/8" 1.02
V53 13 0.49 1.06 0.59 0.16 1.14 0.18 1.83 1.56 0.16 1/2" 1.14
Series Drawing N P Q R S T U V X Y Z
V50 12 0.91 1/8" 0.13 0.24 0.04 0.51 0.71 1.16 0.02 1/8" 0.53
V51 13 0.98 1/4" 0.13 0.24 0.08 0.67 0.89 1.02 - 1/8" 0.69
V52 13 1.61 3/8" 0.18 0.31 - 0.91 1.18 1.61 - 1/8" 0.67
V53 13 1.89 1/2" 0.17 0.31 0.10 0.91 1.18 1.59 - 1/8" 0.79
N/us 5.3.541.11
V50 ... V53 Series ® ®
3/2 Double air pilot valve, 3/2 Double air pilot valve,
1/8" port 1/4"... 1/2" ports
14 J
15 J
X
L AC L AC
C AB
D
H
G
A
H
A
G
Y
Y
F
F
R P R P
Z
Z
D
C AB
V V
R R
Q Q
S
S
T
U
U
T
P P
N AD N AD
B B
Series Drawing AB AC AD B C D F G H J L
V50 12 0.53 0.85 0.59 2.72 0.59 0.13 1.06 0.20 0.12 1/8" 0.57
V51 13 0.53 0.67 0.53 3.11 0.98 0.17 1.38 0.33 0.12 1/4" 0.71
V52 13 0.51 1.02 0.59 4.06 1.02 0.18 1.83 1.56 0.16 3/8" 1.02
V53 13 0.49 1.06 0.59 4.33 1.14 0.18 1.83 1.56 0.16 1/2" 1.14
Series Drawing N P Q R S T U V X Y Z
V50 12 0.91 1/8" 0.13 0.24 0.04 0.51 0.71 1.16 0.02 1/8" 0.53
V51 13 0.98 1/4" 0.13 0.24 0.08 0.67 0.89 1.02 - 1/8" 0.69
V52 13 1.61 3/8" 0.18 0.31 - 0.91 1.18 1.61 - 1/8" 0.67
V53 13 1.89 1/2" 0.17 0.31 0.10 0.91 1.18 1.59 - 1/8" 0.79
N/us 5.3.541.12 Our policy is one of continued research and development. We therefore reserve the right to amend,
10/09
V50 ... V53 Series
® ®
5/2 Single air pilot valve, 5/2 Single air pilot valve,
1/8" port 1/4"... 1/2" ports
16 J 17 J
K K
L L
V V
H
G
B A B A
H
G
F
Y
Y
R2 P R1
F
R2 P R1
Z
Z
D
D
C
C
O
R R O
P Q Q P
S
S
T
U
T
U
N N
B B
Series Drawing B C D F G H J K L N
V50 16 2.87 0.57 0.13 1.06 0.20 0.12 1/8" 1/8" 1.14 1.34
V51 17 3.05 0.79 0.17 1.38 0.28 0.12 1/4" 1/8" 1.42 1.50
V52 17 4.17 1.02 0.22 1.83 0.18 0.16 3/8" 3/8" 2.05 0.51
V53 17 4.65 1.14 0.18 1.83 0.28 0.16 1/2" 1/2" 2.28 2.83
Series Drawing O P Q R S T U V Y Z
V50 16 0.63 1/8" 0.13 0.24 0.08 0.51 0.71 1.30 1/8" 0.53
V51 17 0.83 1/4" 0.13 0.24 0.12 0.67 0.89 1.26 1/8" 0.69
V52 17 1.18 3/8" 0.18 0.31 - 0.91 1.18 1.77 1/8" 0.67
V53 17 1.10 1/2" 0.17 0.31 0.18 0.91 1.18 2.01 1/8" 0.79
N/us 5.3.541.13
V50 ... V53 Series ® ®
1/8" port 1/4"... 1/2" ports
18 J 19 J
K K
L L
H
B A
H
B A
G
G
F
Y
Y
F
R2 P R1 R2 P R1
Z
Z
D D
C C
O
R R O
P Q Q P
S
S
T
U
T
U
N N
B B
V50 18 3.15 0.57 0.13 1.06 0.20 0.12 1/8" 1/8" 1.14 1.34
V51 19 3.58 0.79 0.17 1.38 0.28 0.12 1/4" 1/8" 1.42 1.50
V52 19 4.80 1.02 0.22 1.83 0.18 0.16 3/8" 3/8" 2.05 0.51
V53 19 5.28 1.14 0.18 1.83 0.28 0.16 1/2" 1/2" 2.28 2.83
Series Drawing O P Q R S T U Y Z
V50 18 0.63 1/8" 0.13 0.24 0.08 0.51 0.71 1/8" 0.53
V51 19 0.83 1/4" 0.13 0.24 0.12 0.67 0.89 1/8" 0.69
V52 19 1.18 3/8" 0.18 0.31 - 0.91 1.18 1/8" 0.67
V53 199 1.10 1/2" 0.17 0.31 0.18 0.91 1.18 1/8" 0.79
10/09
V50 ... V53 Series ® ®
1/8" port 1/4" port
20 J 21 J
K K
L L
V V
H
B A G B A
H
G
F
Y
F
R2 P R1 R2 P R1
Z
Z
D D
C C
O
R R O
P Q Q P
S
S
T
U
U
T
N N
B B
5/3 Double air pilot valve,

3/8" and 1/2" ports
22 J
K
L
B A
H
G
Y
R2 P R1
Z
D
C
R O
Q P
S
U
T
N
B
V50 19 3.50 0.57 0.13 1.06 0.20 0.12 1/8“ 1/8“ 1.14 1.34
V51 20 4.41 0.79 0.17 1.38 0.28 0.12 1/4“ 1/8“ 1.42 1.50
V52 21 6.91 1.02 0.22 1.83 0.18 0.16 3/8“ 3/8“ 2.05 0.51
V53 21 7.38 1.14 0.18 1.83 0.28 0.16 1/2“ 1/2“ 2.28 2.83
Series Drawing O P Q R S T U V Y Z
V50 19 0.63 1/8“ 0.13 0.24 0.08 0.51 0.71 1.30 1/8“ 0.53
V51 20 0.83 1/4“ 0.13 0.24 0.12 0.67 0.89 1.30 1/8“ 0.69
V52 21 1.18 3/8“ 0.18 0.31 - 0.91 1.18 1.77 1/8“ 0.67
V53 21 1.10 1/2“ 0.17 0.31 0.18 0.91 1.18 2.01 1/8“ 0.79
10/09
V50 ... V53 Series
® ®
Manifold system, 3/2 valves

For V50 and V51 for V52 and V53
E
D
D
A
A
B
B
C
C
P
K
P
K
L
J
J
F
G
H
Series A B C D E ØG H J K L P Weight (lb)
V50 1/4” 0.87 1.65 0.39 1.10 0.18 0.20 0.75 0.75 0.75 + (N x 0.75) 0.35 + (N x 0.75) 0.11 + (N x 0.11)
V51 1/4” 0.87 1.65 0.39 1.10 0.18 0.24 1.06 0.91 1.22 + (N x 0.91) 0.75 + (N x 0.91) 0.18 + (N x 0.13)
V52 3/8” 1.02 2.60 0.45 1.06 0.18 0.20 0.98 1.22 0.75 + (N x 1.22) 0.35 + (N x 1.22) 0.13 + (N x 0.24)
V53 1/2” 1.18 2.83 0.59 1.26 0.18 0.20 0.98 1.22 0.75 + (N x 1.22) 0.35 + (N x 1.22) 0.15 + (N x 0.31)
N = Number of stations 2 to 10
Manifold system, 5/2 valves

E
N
D
A
B
C
J
K
P
L
F
G
Series A B C D E F ØG H J K L P Weight (lb)

V50 1/4” 1.57 2.28 0.43 0.98 0.79 0.18 0.20 0.75 0.75 0.75 + (N x 0.75) 0.35 + (N x 0.75) 0.89 + (N x 0.89)
V51 1/4” 1.69 2.36 0.39 0.98 0.83 0.18 0.24 0.91 0.91 0.91 + (N x 1.22) 0.43 + (N x 0.91) 0.15 + (N x 0.13)
V52 3/8” 2.40 3.31 0.47 1.06 1.18 0.18 0.20 0.98 1.22 0.75 + (N x 1.22) 0.35 + (N x 1.22) 0.13 + (N x 0.20)
V53 1/2” 2.28 3.78 0.51 1.18 1.18 0.18 0.20 0.98 1.22 0.75 + (N x 1.22) 0.35 + (N x 1.22) 0.18 + (N x 0.33)
N = Number of stations 2 to 10
N/US 5.3.541.016
V50 ... V53 Series
® ®
Blanking plate
C
E
F
A
B
Type For function A B C E F Weight (lb)

V500351 3/2 0.91 1.38 0.08 0.51 0.71 0.02
V510351 3/2 0.98 1.50 0.08 0.67 0.89 0.03
V520351 3/2 1.61 2.17 0.08 0.91 1.18 0.07
V530351 3/2 1.89 2.44 0.08 091 1.18 0.13
V500551 5/2 1.33 1.69 0.08 0.51 0.71 0.02
V510551 5/2 1.50 2.0 0.08 0.67 0.89 0.04
V520551 5/2 0.51 2.91 0.08 0.91 1.18 0.07
V530551 5/2 2.83 3.39 0.08 0.91 1.20 0.18
Warning
These products are intended for use in industrial compressed air systems and to provide adequate safeguards to prevent personal
systems only. Do not use these products where pressures and injury or damage to equipment in the event of such failure.
temperatures can exceed those listed under ‘Technical Data’.
System designers must provide a warning to end users in the
Before using these products with fluids other than those specified, for system instructional manual if protection against a failure mode
non-industrial applications, life-support systems, or other applications cannot be adequately provided.
not within published specifications, consult NORGREN.
System designers and end users are cautioned to review specific
Through misuse, age, or malfunction, components used in fluid power warnings found in instruction sheets packed and shipped with these
systems can fail in various modes. The system designer is warned to products.
consider the failure modes of all component parts used in fluid power
N/US 5.3.541.017
PARTS LIST
OPERATING AND
SERVICE MANUAL
LEGEND
“P” SERIES
BLOWERS
6” -- 8” GEAR DIAMETER
Models
GAF_ _P_
GAG_ _P_
GAH_ _P_
SB-- 7-- 622

Version 03
November, 2005
MAINTAIN BLOWER RELIABILITY AND PERFORMANCE
WITH GENUINE GARDNER DENVER
PARTS AND SUPPORT SERVICES
Factory genuine parts, manufactured to design toler- blower investment with these services:
ances, are developed for optimum dependability ------
1. Trained parts technical representatives to assist
specifically for your blower. Design and material innova-
tions are born from years of experience with hundreds you in selecting the correct replacement parts.
of different blower applications. When you specify 2. Complete inventory of new machines and new,
factory genuine parts you are assured of receiving parts genuine factory parts.
that incorporate the most current design advancements
3. A full line of factory tested AEONt PD blower lubri-
. . . manufactured in our state--of--the--art blower factory
cants specifically formulated for optimum perfor-
under exacting quality standards.
mance in all blowers.
Your AUTHORIZED DISTRIBUTOR offers all the
4. Authorized Distributor service technicians are
backup you require. A worldwide network of authorized
factory-trained and skilled in blower maintenance
distributors provides the finest product support in the
and repair. They are ready to respond and assist
blower industry.
you by providing fast, expert maintenance and
Your AUTHORIZED DISTRIBUTOR can support your repair services.
INSTRUCTIONS FOR DETERMINING BLOWER CONFIGURATION
1. Face the blower drive shaft. when the drive shaft is above the horizontal center
line of the blower.
2. In a VERTICAL configuration, air flow is horizontal.
5. In a horizontal configuration, a RIGHT HAND
3. In a HORIZONTAL configuration, air flow is vertical.
exists when the drive shaft is to the right of the
4. In a vertical configuration, a BOTTOM HAND vertical center line of the blower. A LEFT HAND
exists when the drive shaft is below the horizontal exists when the drive shaft is to the left of the
center line of the blower. A TOP HAND exists vertical center line of the blower.
INSTRUCTIONS FOR ORDERING REPAIR PARTS
For pricing and ordering information, contact your nearest AUTHORIZED FACTORY DISTRIBUTOR.
When ordering parts, specify Blower MODEL and SERIAL NUMBER (see nameplate on unit).
Rely upon the knowledge and experience of your AUTHORIZED DISTRIBUTOR and let them assist you in making
the proper parts selection for your blower.
For the location of your local authorized Gardner Denver blower distributor refer to the yellow pages of your
phone directory, check the Web site at www.gardnerdenver.com or contact:
Gardner Denver
1800 Gardner Expressway
Quincy, IL 62305
Phone: (217) 222--5400
Fax: (217) 221--8780
SB--7--622 Page i
FOREWORD
SutorbiltR blowers are the result of advanced engineering and skilled manufacturing. To be assured of receiving
maximum service from this machine the owner must exercise care in its operation and maintenance. This book is
written to give the operator and maintenance department essential information for day-to-day operation, mainte-
nance and adjustment. Careful adherence to these instructions will result in economical operation and minimum
downtime.
Danger is used to indicate the presence of a hazard which will cause severe personal
injury, death, or substantial property damage if the warning is ignored.
Warning is used to indicate the presence of a hazard which can cause severe person-
al injury, death, or substantial property damage if the warning is ignored.
Caution is used to indicate the presence of a hazard which will or can cause minor
personal injury or property damage if the warning is ignored.
Notice is used to notify people of installation, operation or maintenance information

which is important but not hazard-- related.
SB--7--622 Page ii
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Safety is everybody’s business and is based on your use of good common sense. All situations or circumstances
cannot always be predicted and covered by established rules. Therefore, use your past experience, watch out for
safety hazards and be cautious. Some general safety precautions are given below:
Failure to observe these notices could result in injury to or death of personnel.

D Keep fingers and clothing away from blower inlet and discharge ports,
revolving belts, sheaves, drive coupling, etc.
D Do not use the air discharge from this unit for breathing -- not suitable for
human consumption.
D Do not loosen or remove the oil filler plug, drain plugs, covers, or break any
connections, etc., in the blower air or oil system until the unit is shut down
and the air pressure has been relieved.
D Electrical shock can and may be fatal.
D Blower unit must be grounded in accordance with the National Electrical
Code. A ground jumper equal to the size of the equipment ground conductor
must be used to connect the blower motor base to the unit base.
D Open main disconnect switch, tag and lockout before working on the control.
D Disconnect the blower unit from its power source, tag and lockout before
working on the unit -- the machine may be automatically controlled and may
start at any time.
Failure to observe these notices could result in damage to equipment.

D Stop the unit if any repairs or adjustments on or around the blower are
required.
D Disconnect the blower unit from its power source, tag and lockout before
working on the unit -- the machine may be automatically controlled and may
start at any time.
D Do not exceed the rated maximum speed shown on the nameplate.
D Do not operate unit if safety devices are not operating properly. Check
periodically. Never bypass safety devices.
SB--7--622 Page iii

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
Maintain Blower Reliability and Performance with Genuine Gardner Denver Parts and Support Services . . . . . . i
Instructions for Ordering Repair Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Instructions for Determining Blower Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
List of Illustrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
Sutorbilt Legend Series Sutorbilt Blowers Matrix/Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi
Introduction, Your Key To Trouble Free Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Section 1, Equipment Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Section 2, Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Section 3, Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Section 4, Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Section 5, Special Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Section 6, Disassembly Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Section 7, Assembly Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Section 8, Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Last Page
SB--7--622 Page iv
INDEX
Air Filters and Filter--Silencers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Gear End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS, SECTION 7 . . . . . 18 Lubrication Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Blower Configuration, Determining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i Matrix/Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi

Blower Startup Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Mechanical Seals, Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Mounting Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Checklist, Blower Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Mounting Feet, Repositioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS, SECTION 6 . . 15 OPERATION, SECTION 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Drive End Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Outline Drawing and Parts List
Drive Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Model GAF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 26
Model GAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 28
EQUIPMENT CHECK, SECTION 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Model GAH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 30
Filter--Silencers and Air Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 PARTS LIST, SECTION 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Precautions, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Protective Materials, Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Gear End Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Recommended Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Impeller End Clearance, Setting, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Removing Protective Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
INSTALLATION, SECTION 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Repair Parts, Ordering Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Installation, Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Installation, Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii, 10
Setting Impeller End Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Installing Timing Gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED, SECTION 5 . . . . 11
Limitations, Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Startup Checklist, Blower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Location, Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Lubricant, Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Timing Gears, Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
LUBRICATION, SECTION 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Trouble Shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Lubrication
Drive End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 YOUR KEY TO TROUBLE FREE SERVICE,
Filling Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Figure 1 Blower Mounting Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Figure 2 Belt Drive Overhung Load Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Figure 3 Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Figure 4 Approximate Oil Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Figure 5 Lubrication Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Figure 6 Temperature Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Figure 7 Maximum Operating Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Figure 8 Puller Plate -- SK2154 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Figure 9 Puller Plate -- SK2150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Figure 10 Mechanical Seal Installation Tool -- SK2152 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Figure 11 Bearing Press Tool -- Mechanical Seal Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Figure 24 Torque (Ft--Lbs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
SB--7--622 Page v
SUTORBILT LEGEND SERIES SUTORBILT BLOWERS
MATRIX/MENU
NOTICE TO CUSTOMER -- To find the construction options for

G A P
your blower unit, FILL IN THE BALANCE OF LETTERS OR
__ __ __ __ __ __ __
NUMBERS FROM YOUR UNIT NAMEPLATE
COLUMN NUMBER: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
FOLLOW THE LINE DOWN AND OVER FROM EACH SPACE

THUS FILLED IN TO FIND THE APPROPRIATE
CONSTRUCTION OPTION WITH WHICH YOUR MACHINE
IS EQUIPPED.
COLUMN 1 -- BASIC DESIGNATOR
COLUMN 2 -- PRODUCT FAMILY
COLUMN 3 -- GEAR DIAMETER

F. 6”
G. 7”
H. 8”
COLUMN 4 -- CASE LENGTH

L -- Low Pressure
M -- Medium Pressure
H -- High Pressure
COLUMN 5 -- CONFIGURATION
A. Vertical--Top Hand--Central Timed
B. Vertical--Bottom Hand--Central Timed
C. Horizontal--Left Hand--Central Timed
D. Horizontal--Right Hand--Central Timed
COLUMN 6 -- DESIGN VERSION
COLUMN 7 -- ADDITIONAL DESCRIPTION

A. Lip Seal
B. Mechanical Seal
SB--7--622 Page vi
INTRODUCTION
YOUR KEY TO TROUBLE FREE SERVICE
Thank you for investing in Sutorbilt quality. The Sutor- nance procedures that you must observe to assure
bilt reputation for rugged dependability has been optimum blower performance. There is no guesswork
earned by over 50 years of service in demanding, in the manufacture of your highly advanced Sutorbilt
industrial operations where downtime cannot be blower and there must be none in preparing the blower
tolerated and efficient blower performance is expected. to get the job done in the field.
Your Sutorbilt blower is a precision engineered blower

that has been carefully manufactured and thoroughly The purpose of this manual is to help you properly
tested at the state-of-the-art Gardner Denver Blower install, operate and maintain your Sutorbilt blower. It is
Factory in Sedalia, Missouri. essential that you review all sections of this manual in
preparation for installing your blower. Follow the
As with other precision machinery, there are several instructions carefully and you will be rewarded with
relatively simple installation, operation and mainte- trouble--free Sutorbilt service . . . year in and year out.
SB--7--622 Page 1
SECTION 1
EQUIPMENT CHECK
Before uncrating, check the packing slip carefully to be

sure all the parts have been received. All accessories
are listed as separate items on the packing slip, and
small important accessories such as relief valves can
be overlooked or lost. After every item on the packing Before running the blower, drain the
slip has been checked off, uncrate carefully. Register oil and replace to the proper operat-
a claim with the carrier for lost or damaged equipment. ing level with clean, fresh lubricant.
7. Rotate the blower shaft (10 to 25 turns) monthly

during storage. Inspect the blower shaft (near the
shaft seal area) monthly and spray with rust inhibi-
Customers are cautioned to provide tor if needed.
adequate protection, warning and
safety equipment necessary to protect 8. For long term storage (over six (6) months),
contact Sutorbilt Customer Service for recom-
personnel against hazards involved in mendations.
installation and operation of this
equipment in the system or facility.
REMOVING PROTECTIVE MATERIALS
The shaft extension is protected with rust inhibitor
which can be removed with any standard solvent.
STORAGE
Your Sutorbilt Blower was packaged at the factory with

adequate protection to permit normal storage for up to
six (6) months.
Follow the safety directions of the
If the unit is to be stored under adverse conditions or solvent manufacturer.
for extended periods of time, the following additional
measures should be taken to prevent damage.
1. Store the blower in a clean, dry, heated (if

possible) area. Blower inlet and outlet are temporarily capped to keep
out dirt and other contaminants during shipment.
These covers must be removed before start--up.
2. Make certain inlet and discharge air ports are
tightly covered to prevent foreign material from The internal surfaces of all Sutorbilt units are mist
entering the air box. sprayed with a rust preventative to protect the machine
during shipment. Remove this film upon initial startup,
3. All exposed, non--painted surfaces should be using any commercial safety solvent. Care should be
protected against rust and corrosion. exercised to lock out the blower to prevent start--up
4. Provide adequate protection to avoid accidental

mechanical damage.
5. In high humidity or corrosive environments, addi-

tional measures may be required to prevent rust-
Rotating components will cause
ing of the blower internal surfaces. severe injury in case of personal
contact. Keep hands away from blow-
6. To prevent rusting of gears, bearings, etc., the oil er inlet and discharge ports.
reservoirs may be filled with normal operating oil.
SB--7--622 Page 2
SECTION 2
INSTALLATION
LOCATION MOUNTING CONFIGURATIONS
If possible, install the blower in a well lit, clean, dry place The blower flex--mount design enables horizontal and
with plenty of room for inspection and maintenance. vertical mounting configurations with top or bottom
hand, right or left hand shaft positioning. The units are
FOUNDATIONS center timed allowing rotation in either direction (refer
to FIGURE 1). If converting a blower from vertical to
For permanent installations we recommend concrete horizontal, or horizontal to vertical mounting configura-
foundations be provided, and the equipment should be tion, additional mounting feet will be required.
grouted to the concrete. It is necessary that a suitable
base be used, such as a steel combination base under REPOSITIONING THE MOUNTING FEET:
blower and motor, or a separate sole plate under each.
1. Position the mounting feet to the desired location
Before grouting, equipment must be leveled, free of all
and snug the capscrew.
strains, and anchored so no movement will occur
during setting of grout. After grout has completely 2. Place the blower on its feet on a flat surface.
hardened, a recheck is necessary to compensate for 3. Loosen mounting feet capscrews and level unit
shrinkage, etc. If required, add shims under blower feet up. The bench or blower base flatness should be
after final tightening of foundation anchor bolts to within .002 of an inch.
remove strain from the blower housing.
Where jack screws or wedges are used during

grouting, they must be backed off or removed before
final tightening of anchor bolts.
If the unit is not flat within .002 of an
Where a concrete foundation is not feasible, care must inch, it will be necessary to shim the
be taken to insure that equipment is firmly anchored to blower feet at installation.
adequate structural members.
FIGURE 1 - BLOWER MOUNTING CONFIGURATIONS
SB--7--622 Page 3
4. Secure the mounting feet capscrews to the torque sheave positioning is as close as possible to the blower
value in FIGURE 24, page 24. drive cover, not to exceed dimension “C” in Drive Shaft
Illustration, FIGURE 2, page 5.
The calculated shaft moment must not exceed the
maximum allowable moment listed in Maximum Allow-
able Moment Chart, FIGURE 2, page 5. If the calcu-
lated shaft moment exceeds the maximum allowable
When changing mounting configura- moment:
tion, it may be necessary to reposition D Increase Sheave Diameters to Reduce Belt Pull
vent plug (B), and drain plug (A). Re-
fer to FIGURE 3, page 6, for correct D Use Jackshaft Drive
location. D Use Direct Coupled or Gearbox Drive
To calculate shaft moment for a given V--Belt Drive

DRIVE INSTALLATION Arrangement:
When selecting a V-belt drive, check to be sure the
1. Use the formula for Calculation of Belt Pull,
shaft overhung load limitation is not exceeded. Refer
FIGURE 2, page 5, to calculate belt pull. Refer
to FIGURE 2, page 5, for overhung load calculations
to Arc of Contact Factor Chart, FIGURE 2, page
and limitations.
5.
Belt drives must be carefully aligned. Motor and blower
pulleys must be parallel to each other and in the same 2. Insert the calculated belt pull into the formula for
plane within 1/32 inch. Belt tension should be carefully Calculation of Shaft Moment, FIGURE 2, page
adjusted to the belt manufacturer’s recommendation 5, to arrive at the calculated shaft moment.
using a belt tension gauge. Check tension frequently
during the first day of operation. PIPING
Inlet and discharge connections on all blowers are

large enough to handle maximum volume with
minimum friction loss. Reducing the pipe diameter on
either inlet or discharge will only create additional line
Overtightening belts leads to heavy loss and increase the overall pressure differential.
bearing loads and premature failure.
Excessive weight and thermal expansion of piping and
fittings will cause internal misalignment and premature
wear. Never allow the blower to carry the weight of the
On the direct connected units, alignment and lubrica- pipe. If possible, a spool or sleeve-type expansion joint
tion of couplings to specifications of the coupling should be installed between the unit and the piping.
manufacturer is very important. When mounted drives Where a flexible connection is not practical, the weight
are supplied from the factory, proper alignment has of the rigid connection must be separately supported.
been established before shipment. However, during
shipping, handling and installation, it is likely that the All system piping must be cleaned internally before
alignment has been disturbed and final adjustment connecting to the blower.
must be made before startup.
Exceeding overhung load limitations Sutorbilt blowers are shipped dry

leads to unwarrantable premature from the factory. Do not attempt to
bearing failure and shaft breakage. operate the blower before following
proper lubrication instructions.
Permanent damage to the gears,
The location of the sheave on the blower shaft greatly
bearings and seals will occur.
affects the stress in the shaft. The optimum blower
SB--7--622 Page 4
Dimensions Maximum
Gear (Inches) Allowable
Diameter Moment
(Inches) A B C (LB--IN)
(Max)
6 4.08 1.14 .38 1788

7 4.50 1.31 .38 3000
8 5.57 1.77 .38 4144
MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE MOMENT DRIVE SHAFT ILLUSTRATION
Z Ac Z Ac Z Ac Z Ac Z Ac Z Ac
0.000 1.000 0.250 0.966 0.500 0.926 0.750 0.879 1.000 0.823 1.250 0.751
0.025 0.997 0.275 0.962 0.525 0.922 0.775 0.874 1.025 0.816 1.275 0.742
0.050 0.994 0.300 0.958 0.550 0.917 0.800 0.869 1.050 0.810 1.300 0.734
0.075 0.990 0.325 0.954 0.575 0.913 0.825 0.864 1.075 0.803 1.325 0.725
0.100 0.987 0.350 0.951 0.600 0.908 0.850 0.858 1.100 0.796 1.350 0.716
0.125 0.983 0.375 0.947 0.625 0.904 0.875 0.852 1.125 0.789 1.375 0.706
0.150 0.980 0.400 0.943 0.650 0.899 0.900 0.847 1.150 0.782 1.400 0.697
0.175 0.977 0.425 0.939 0.675 0.894 0.925 0.841 1.175 0.774 1.425 0.687
0.200 0.973 0.450 0.935 0.700 0.889 0.950 0.835 1.200 0.767
0.225 0.969 0.475 0.930 0.725 0.884 0.975 0.829 1.225 0.759
ARC OF CONTACT FACTORS
Belt Pull = [ 2.5Ac-- Ac ] [ 125954D xxRPM

Hp x S.F.
]
Key: Ac = Arc of Contact Factor (Refer to Arc of Contact Factors Chart above)
Hp = Blower Horsepower for Operating Conditions
S.F. = Actual Drive Service Factor
D = Blower Sheave Pitch Diameter in Inches
RPM = Blower Sheave Speed
Z =
[ Large Sheave Pitch Diameter (in) -- Small Sheave Pitch Diameter (in)
Sheave Center Distance (in)
]
CALCULATION OF BELT PULL
Shaft Moment (LB--IN) = Belt Pull x [ B+C+ (Sheave2 Width)]

CALCULATION OF SHAFT MOMENT
FIGURE 2 - BELT DRIVE OVERHUNG LOAD CALCULATIONS
SB--7--622 Page 5
SECTION 3
LUBRICATION
A. OIL DRAIN PLUG

B. BREATHER / OIL FILL
C. GREASE FITTING
E. GREASE VENTS
H. OIL LEVEL GAUGE
FIGURE 3 - LUBRICATION
At the gear end the timing gear teeth are lubricated by bearings through grease fittings located at (C). When
being partially submerged in oil. The gear teeth serve regreasing, the old grease will be forced out of the
as oil slingers for gear end bearings. At the drive end vents (E). To prevent damage to seals, these vents
the bearings are grease lubricated. must be open at all times.
FILLING PROCEDURE RECOMMENDED LUBRICANT
Refer to FIGURE 3. Remove the breather (B) from the

gear cover. Add oil to the gear case until it reaches the Gear
center line of the oil level gauge (H). Secure breather Diameter Vertical Horizontal
(B) in its correct location.
6” 1--1/4 PT. 3 PT.
7” 1--2/3 PT. 3--1/2 PT.
LUBRICATION SERVICE
8” 2--1/2 PT. 7 PT.
Add fresh oil as required to maintain proper level. The
oil should be drained, flushed and replaced every 1500 Quantities are for purchase estimates only.
hours or more frequently if inspection so indicates. The
oil drain plug is located at (A).
FIGURE 4 - APPROXIMATE OIL CAPACITIES
GEAR END LUBRICATION
AEON PD is formulated especially for positive

Do not overfill as this will tend to displacement blower service to provide maximum
cause excessive heating of the gears blower protection at any temperature. One filling of
and may damage the unit. AEON PD will last a minimum of 4 times longer than a
premium mineral oil. Refer to FIGURE 5, page 7.
Bearings on the drive end of the blower require grease AEON PD 1 Quart Bottle Part No. 28G23
lubrication every 500 hours of operation. Lubricate the AEON PD 12 Quart Case Part No. 28G24
SB--7--622 Page 6
Blower Factory Tested
Discharge Recommended and
Temperature Approved Lubricant
Servicing the air filters is one of the
_F _C AEON PD most important maintenance opera-
32_ 0_ Synthetic Blower Lubricant tions to be performed to insure long
blower life.
100_ 38_ One Superior Lubricant
275_ 135_ For
350_ 177_ All Operating Temperatures Servicing frequency of filter elements is not time
predictable. A differential pressure indicator, with a
continuous gauge reading, should be installed across
the inlet filter. It will tell how much of the service life of
FIGURE 5 - TEMPERATURE CHART the filter element has been used. It will also eliminate
both premature filter servicing and premature blower
failure due to a plugged filter when the filter pressure
drop is used to establish maintenance points.
DRIVE END LUBRICATION
In all cases refer to the filter manufacturer’s service
Grease drive end bearings every 500 hours of opera- instructions. Due to the many types of filters, it is not
tion with a non--corrosive, extreme pressure bearing practical to give specific instructions covering all
grease of the following specification: models.
Blower Grease
Discharge Temperature Specification
Up to 350_ F (177_ C) NLGI Grade 2 EP No matter what type of filter is used,

always make sure all seats, gaskets,
clamps and hose connections on the
If not using AEON PD synthetic blower lubricant, use
oils with rust and oxidation inhibitors, anti-foam addi- filter and inlet line are absolutely air
tives and the viscosities listed in FIGURE 6. tight. Each time the filter is serviced,
inspect interior of the blower for dirt.
AIR FILTERS AND FILTER SILENCERS
Blower Oil Oil Viscosity

Discharge Grade SUS
Temperature ISO @ 100_ F
32_ F to 100_ F 100 465
(0_ C to 38_ C)
100_ F to 225_ F 150 700
(38_ C to 105_ C)
225_ F to 300_ F 220 1000
(105_ C to 149_ C)
Over 300_ F * *
(149_ C)
* The oil viscosity must be 70 SUS minimum at discharge temperature minus 50_ F.
FIGURE 6 - LUBRICATION RECOMMENDATION
SB--7--622 Page 7
SECTION 4
OPERATION
Future operating problems can be avoided if proper should be tested at initial startup to be sure they are ad-
precautions are observed when the equipment is first justed to relieve at or below the maximum pressure dif-
put into service. ferential rating of the blower.
Before starting under power, the blower should be
turned over by hand to make certain there is no binding,
or internal contact.
Each size blower has limits on pressure differential, Relief valves should be placed as
running speed, and discharge temperature which must close as possible to the blower inlet
not be exceeded. These limits are shown in the follow- or discharge.
ing tabulation.
In some instances, pressure may be relieved at a lower

point than the blower maximum in order to protect the
motor or the equipment served by the blower.
Operating beyond the specified oper-
Discharge temperature switches are recommended to
ating limitations will result in damage
protect against excessive inlet restriction or inlet tem-
to the unit. peratures. Check valves in the discharge line on pres-
sure blowers and in the inlet line on vacuum blowers
It is important that the pressures and temperatures are are recommended to protect the blower from motoring
measured directly at the ports of the blower to avoid er- backwards when shut down under load.
ror that may be caused by intervening pipe runs, fit-
tings, etc. LIMITATIONS
Relief valves should be used to protect against exces- For information regarding limitations, refer to
sive pressure or vacuum conditions. These valves FIGURE 7, below.
MAXIMUM OPERATING LIMITATIONS
PRESSURE VACUUM DISCHARGE

SIZE RPM PSI IN HG TEMPERATURE _F
6LP 2350 7 14 260

6MP 2350 14 16 325
6HP 2350 15 16 340
7LP 2050 6 12 260
7MP 2050 10 16 325
7HP 2050 15 16 340
8LP 1800 6 12 260
8MP 1800 10 16 325
8HP 1800 15 16 340
DO NOT EXCEED THESE LIMITS
Blower speed, line losses, elevation, and increased inlet temperatures

will affect the maximum operating limitations.
FIGURE 7 - MAXIMUM OPERATING LIMITATIONS
SB--7--622 Page 8
BLOWER STARTUP CHECKLIST
This startup procedure should be followed during the initial installation and after any shutdown periods or after the
blower has been worked on or moved to a new location. It is suggested that the steps be followed in sequence
and checked off ( ) in the boxes provided.
V 1. Check the unit and all piping for foreign material and clean if required.
V 2. Check the flatness of the feet and the alignment of the drive. Feet that are bolted down in a bind
can cause case distortion and internal rubbing. Misaligned V-drives can cause the impellers to rub
against the headplates and cause a reduction in the volumetric efficiency of the unit. Misaligned
couplings can ruin bearings.
V 3. If blower is V--belt driven, check the belt tension and alignment. Over-tensioned belts create heavy
bearing loads which leads to premature failure.
V 4. Be sure adequate drive guards are in place to protect the operator from severe personal injury from
incidental contact.
V 5. Check the unit for proper lubrication. Proper oil level cannot be overemphasized. Too little oil will
ruin bearings and gears. Too much oil will cause overheating and can ruin gears and cause other
damage. Insure drive end bearings are greased.
V 6. With motor locked out, turn the drive shaft by hand to be certain the impellers do not bind.
V 7. “Jog” the unit with the motor a few times to check rotation and to be certain it turns freely and
smoothly.
V 8. The internal surfaces of all Sutorbilt units are mist sprayed with a rust preventive to protect the
machine during the shipping and installation period. This film should be removed upon initial
start--up.
V 9. Start the unit and operate 15 minutes at no load. During this time, check for hot spots and other
indications of interference.
V 10. Apply the load and observe the operation of the unit for one hour. Check frequently during the first
day of operation.
V 11. If malfunctions occur, do not continue to operate. Problems such as knocking impellers can cause
serious damage if the unit is operated without correction.
SB--7--622 Page 9
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
1. Do not operate blower with open inlet or outlet
port.
2. Do not exceed specified vacuum or pressure
limitations. Do not exceed sheave or coupling
3. Do not operate above or below recommended manufacturers’ rim speed limit.
blower speed range.
4. Blower is not to be used where non--sparking
equipment is specified. 6. The blower and blower discharge piping may be
5. Do not operate without belt guard or coupling extremely hot and can cause skin burns on contact.
shield. 7. Prolonged exposure may require ear protection.
TROUBLE SHOOTING
No matter how well the equipment is designed and ment needs attention, the operator or repairman should
manufactured, there may be times when servicing will be able to locate the cause and correct the trouble
be required due to normal wear, the need for adjust- quickly. The Trouble Shooting Chart below is provided
ment, or various external causes. Whenever equip- to assist the mechanic in those respects.
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSES SOLUTION
1. Unit out of time. 1. Retime impellers.

2. Distortion due to improper 2. Check mounting alignment and
mounting or pipe strains. relieve pipe strains.
Knocking 3. Excessive pressure differential. 3. Reduce to manufacturer’s
recommended pressure. Examine
relief valve, re-set if necessary.
4. Worn gears. 4. Replace timing gears.
5. Worn bearings. 5. Replace bearings.
1. Too much oil in gear case. 1. Reduce oil level.

Excessive blower 2. Too low operating speed. 2. Increase blower speed.
temperature. 3. Clogged filter or muffler. 3. Remove cause of obstruction.
4. Excessive pressure differential. 4. Reduce pressure differential
across the blower.
5. Worn impeller clearances. 5. Replace impeller.
6. Internal contact. 6. Correct clearances.
1. Insufficient assembled 1. Correct clearances.
clearances.
Impeller end 2. Case or frame distortion. 2. Check mounting and pipe strain.
or tip drag. 3. Excessive operating pressure. 3. Remove cause.
4. Excessive operating temperature. 4. Remove cause.
Lack of volume. 1. Slipping belts. 1 Tighten belts.

2. Worn clearances. 2. Re-establish proper clearances.
Excessive bearing 1. Improper lubrication. 1. Correct lubrication level. Replace

or gear wear. dirty oil.
1. Headplate, gear case or 1. Clean vents.

Loss of oil. drive cover vents plugged.
2. Worn seal. 2. Replace seals.
SB--7--622 Page 10
SECTION 5
SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED
6” 7” 8”
A 11.00 13.00 16.00 NOTE:
B 6.000 7.000 8.000 1. REMOVE SHARP EDGES
C 2.500 3.000 4.000 2. MAT’L: MED. CARBON STEEL
D 3.000 3.500 4.000
E 1.503 1.679 2.210
F 11.00 13.00 15.00
H 0.437 0.500 0.500
J 1.500 1.688 1.875
K 5.500 6.500 7.500
FIGURE 8 - PULLER PLATE - SK2154
SB--7--622 Page 11
1 PIPE -- STEEL 2” SCH 80
2 MED. CARBON STEEL 1/2”
FIGURE 9 - GEAR DRIVER - SK2150
SB--7--622 Page 12
NOTES:
1. BREAK SHARP EDGES
2. MATERIAL: 4140
3. HEAT TREAT TO RC 48 -- 52
UNIT
SIZE A B C D E F H
6” 2.748 3.150 0.515 1.890 2.450 0.125 1.400
7” 3.000 3.543 0.424 1.863 2.423 0.150 1.616
8” 3.250 3.938 0.407 2.000 2.800 0.150 1.813
FIGURE 10 - MECHANICAL SEAL INSTALLATION TOOL - SK2152
SB--7--622 Page 13
NOTES:
1. BREAK SHARP EDGES
2. MATERIAL: 4140
3. HEAT TREAT TO RC 52 -- 56
UNIT
SIZE A B
6” 1.900 5.000
7” 2.087 5.500
8” 2.406 6.000
FIGURE 11 - BEARING PRESS TOOL - MECHANICAL SEAL UNITS - SK2156
SB--7--622 Page 14
SECTION 6
DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
THEY CAN BE REASSEMBLED IN THE SAME POSI-

TION (IMPELLERS, HEADPLATES, AND GEARS).
4. If the timing gears appear undamaged, the gear
Numbers in parentheses ( ) refer to backlash must be checked to see if the gears can
key numbers in assembly drawings be salvaged.
on pages 25, 27 and 29.
A. Mount a magnetic base dial indicator on the
gear headplate (see FIGURE 12).
1. Drain oil from gear case by removing drain plug B. Lock one impeller stationary by wedging a
(4). feeler gage between the impeller and the
headplate.
2. Remove the socket head bolts (5) from the gear
cover (3). C. The tip of the indicator should be placed at
the center of the contact surface on a tooth
3. Remove the gear cover from gear headplate (18). of the gear on the free shaft.
D. Rock the impeller back and forth by hand and
read the total rotational movement to the
nearest .0005 inches. Do this at four gear
mesh positions 90 degrees apart.
The cover and gear headplate gasket
tends to bond tightly to both sur- E. Permissible gear backlash is shown below.
faces. After socket head bolt remov-
al, it is sometimes necessary to take GEAR DIA. GEAR BACKLASH
a ball peen hammer and a blunt chisel
and drive off the cover. 6” .002 -- .003
7” .003 -- .005
IMPORTANT:
8” .003 -- .006
MARK ALL PARTS WITH A CENTER PUNCH SO
FIGURE 12 FIGURE 13
SB--7--622 Page 15
FIGURE 14 FIGURE 15
If backlash is above the specified lim-

it, the gears are not necessarily unus-
able. Excessive play could be caused
by worn bearings.
5. If timing gears appear to be reusable, matchmark

timing gear toothmesh by making small punch
marks on the ends of meshing gear teeth with a
pin punch and hammer (see FIGURE 13, page
15). The impeller tip to valley (throat) and the case
to headplates should also be match marked to fa-
cilitate blower reassembly.
6. Remove each timing hub (39) and the timing gear
(9) as a complete assembly with a gear puller. FIGURE 16
(See FIGURE 14). Do not remove timing bolts
(38) or threaded taper pins (36), unless the gears
or hubs will be replaced. the cover. Drive shaft oil seal (31) should come
free when cover is removed.
8. Remove mounting foot (17) from the drive head-

plate (24) by removing the capscrews (16).
If replacing the timing gears (9), re- 9. Remove the capscrews (21) which secure the
move the timing hub taper pins (36) by drive headplate (24) to the impeller case (22).
placing washers or an oversized nut
10. Using the fabricated puller plate shown on page
over the extending threaded area of 11, bolt to the drive headplate using the tapped
the pin. Tighten a proper-- sized nut holes used to secure the drive cover.
on the pin and it will eject.
11. Install a gear puller to each shaft and attach the
puller arms to the fabricated plate. Turn each pull-
7. Remove the four socket head cap screws (30) er only half a revolution at a time keeping the ad-
from the drive end bearing cover (29) and remove vance of the shafts as uniform as possible (see
SB--7--622 Page 16
FIGURE 17
FIGURE 15, page 16). After the headplate has 14. Remove the four cap screws (10) which fasten
been removed, detach the puller plate. each bearing retainer (12) to the gear headplate.
12. Remove the two drive end bearings (14) from the 15. Attach fabricated puller plate to the gear head-
drive headplate (24) using a ball peen hammer plate using the tapped holes used to secure the
and punch (see FIGURE 16, page 16). bearing retainers.
16. Install a gear puller to one of the shafts and attach

the puller arms to the fabricated plate (see
FIGURE 17).
Exercise care not to damage the 17. Push the impeller shaft through the gear head-
headplate bearing bores when remov- plate and remove the impeller assembly (23) (see
ing bearings. FIGURE 17). Remove the other impeller assem-
bly following the same procedure.
13. Remove the drive end spacers (33), (34) and (41). 18. Remove mounting foot (17) from the gear head-
The grease seals (15) can now be driven out of the plate by removing 4 capscrews (16).
drive headplate with hammer and punch (see
19. Remove the cap screws (21) securing the gear
FIGURE 16, page 16). Discard the seals as they
headplate to the impeller case. Located near each
will not be reused. Replace grease seals each
dowel pin on the headplate is a threaded hole. In-
time the headplate is removed.
sert a 3/8--16 UNC capscrew into each of the
threaded holes. Tighten the screws evenly until
the headplate separates from the impeller case.
20. Remove the two gear end bearings (14) from the
gear headplate (18) as done in step 12.
Seals and bearings should be re-
placed during overhaul as a matter of 21. Remove the bearing seal spacers (33) and oil
service policy. seals (15) from the gear headplate as done in Step
13.
SB--7--622 Page 17
SECTION 7
ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
INSTALLING MECHANICAL SEALS

A. Lightly coat the headplate bores with assem-
bly lubricant.
Numbers in parentheses ( ) refer to
key numbers in assembly drawings B. Refer to FIGURE 18. Install mechanical seal
(A) into the headplate bore using a press and
on pages 25, 27 and 29. the correct driver shown on page 13. Drive
the seal securely on to its seat.
1. Make sure all metallic parts are clean and free of

any nicks or burrs.
2. Lubricate the outside diameter of the lip seal (15)

with a light oil or grease. Install seals in both the Use extreme care when installing
drive head--plate (24) and gear headplate (18). seals in the headplate bores. Do not
The seal lip should always face towards the bear- attempt to install the mechanical
ing or lubricant. New seals should be installed seals without the use of a press.
each time the headplate is removed. Blows from a hammer or mallet can
damage the fragile seal surface. Too
much force can crush the seal casing.
Make certain the seal is properly
Make sure seals are fully seated. Use seated and undamaged before pro-
extreme care when installing. ceeding.
FIGURE 18
SB--7--622 Page 18
FIGURE 19 FIGURE 20
3. Assemble gear headplate (18) and mounting foot If total clearance is not within the limits specified
(17) to the impeller case with cap screws (21) and in FIGURE 21, page 20, it may be necessary to
where the mounting foot is secured to the head- shim the case to obtain the proper total end clear-
plate use capscrews (16). The two positioning ance. The shim should be placed between the
dowel pins (19) will ensure proper alignment of the drive headplate and impeller case.
headplate and impeller case. Also secure lifting
lugs using capscrews (21) (see exploded assem-
bly drawing page 25). Torque capscrews alter-
nately and evenly. Refer to FIGURE 24, page 24,
for torque specifications. If more than .007” shim is required,
put .007” on the drive end and the
4. Apply a light oil or grease on the shaft seal areas remaining on the gear end.
and the bearing areas. Insert impellers into the
gear headplate using the same headplate bores
as used in the original assembly. 6. Assemble drive headplate (24) to impeller case as
done in step 3 with the gear headplate. If shims
were required, place shims between drive head-
plate and impeller case.
7. Insert bearing--seal spacers (34), (41) into the

drive shaft headplate bore and spacer (33) into the
Seals are delicate; use extreme care remaining bores (see exploded view, page 25).
when installing impeller shafts in the
headplate bores. A piece of light shim MECHANICAL SEALS ONLY
stock wrapped around the shaft key-
way will prevent cutting the seal lip. A. Refer to FIGURE 18, page18. Lightly coat
the impeller shaft (H) and the inside diameter
of the mating ring (B) with assembly
lubricant.
5. Position blower so that impellers are vertical, with
the drive end on top. It will be necessary to use B. Install the mating ring (B) on the shaft only far
blocks in order for the unit to set level. Measure enough to install spacer (34), (41) in the bore
the total end clearance using a depth micrometer and allow for the bearing inner race (E) to be
(see FIGURE 19). started on the shaft.
SB--7--622 Page 19
FIGURE 21
bore, bearing inside diameter, and shaft seat.

Install the spherical roller bearing (35) on the drive
end drive shaft and the double row ball bearing
(14) on the drive end driven shaft. Start the bear-
Do not drive the mating ring down to ing in the bores without force.
the mechanical seal, as this can dam-
age the seal. 9. Attach the puller plate shown on page 11 to the
drive headplate using the tapped holes used to se-
cure the drive cover (see FIGURE 20, page 19).
C. Install mating ring (B) on the drive end short Tighten the bolts so that the advance of the bear-
shaft and the gear end shafts as done in the ings stay as uniform as possible. Bearings should
previous step, but use spacer (33) (refer to be pressed until fully seated in the bore.
gear end, FIGURE 18, page 18).
D. Brush the bearing inner race (E) with a light
oil or grease.
E. Using a press and the bearing installation Bearings will not be flush with gear
tool shown on page 14, install the spherical headplate bores when completely
roller bearing (35) on the drive end drive
seated.
shaft. Install the three double row ball bear-
ings on the remaining shaft ends. Bearings
will position the mating ring (B) to the proper
depth with respect to the mechanical seal (A) 10. Lubricate the gear end bearing fits with a light oil
when the installation tool is tight against the as described previously. Install gear end bearings
headplate. (14) as far as possible without force. Use the fabri-
cated plate, used to install the drive end bearings,
8. Apply a light oil to the drive headplate bearing to press the bearings on the shafts as described
SB--7--622 Page 20
in Step 9. Press bearings into the gear headplate A
until completely seated in the bearing bore.
GEAR
BEARING HEADPLATE
Bearings will not be flush with gear
headplate bores when completely
seated.
SHAFT
11. Impeller should now be checked for free axial
movement by hitting the ends of the impeller
shafts with the palm of your hand.
12. Push the impellers against the gear headplate and

recheck the total end clearance between the drive
headplate and the impellers (see FIGURE 21,
page 20).
FIGURE 22
A. If total end clearance is insufficient, loosen
impeller case to headplate bolts on either
headplate, and move the headplate away
from the case far enough to insert a paper 13. Impeller tip to case clearance should be checked
shim in the amount equal to the insufficient at this time by inserting the correct thickness
clearance. Retighten case bolts and again feeler gauge between the tip and the case (B) and
check the total end clearance. Refer to rotating the impeller (see FIGURE 21, page 20).
FIGURE 21, page 20, for correct clearance. Repeat the procedure on both impellers.
B. Excessive end clearances normally will

require new impeller assemblies, but in some
circumstances the impeller case can be
removed and reduced in width by machining
off the amount of excess clearance. When checking the tip to case clear-
ance, move the feeler gauge over the
entire length of the impeller to ensure
that the tips do not bind along their
length.
These impeller-to-impeller and impel-
ler-to-case clearances are extremely
14. Replace the drive shaft grease seal (31) in the
critical. Even though the blower may drive end cover (29). The seal lip should always
turn freely by hand when cold, under face toward the bearing or lubricant. Pack the
operating conditions, the parts bearing cavities with the recommended grease.
expand, and the rotors are subject to
slight deflection. 15. Secure drive cover (29) and wavy spring (28) to
drive headplate using capscrews (30). Refer to
If the clearances are not sufficient, FIGURE 24, page 24, for torque specifications.
the impellers may contact each other
or the housing with destructive
results. If the clearances are too
great, the blower may not develop the
pressure or airflow that is required to Exercise care not to damage the seal
perform its function. lip as it passes over shaft keyway.
SB--7--622 Page 21
16. SETTING IMPELLER END CLEARANCE
Refer to FIGURE 18, page 18. The gear end

bearings are held in position by the force created
by the wavy spring (28) on the drive end and the
bearing retainer (12) on the gear end. The inter-
ference fit between the shaft (H) and the bearing
inner race (E) keeps the shaft from moving axially.
End clearance adjustment of both impellers is

controlled by adjustment of the bearing retainer
(12). Tightening the bearing retainer screws (10)
moves the bearing to load the wavy spring (28),
and the impeller is forced toward the drive end.
Relaxing the screws allows the wavy spring to re- FIGURE 23
turn the impeller toward the gear end.
A. With impellers tight against the gear head-

A. Apply a light grease, or oil, on the shaft area
plate, measure the distance (A) from the
where the timing gear will be positioned.
bearing outer race to the gear headplate us-
ing a depth micrometer (see FIGURE 22, B. Lubricate the inside diameter of spacers (32)
page 21. with assembly lubricant and install on the
gear end shafts.
B. Subtract 1/3 of the total end clearance from
the value measured at point A. This value is C. Using a piece of paper large enough to cover
the amount of shim (13) that should be the open end of the gear headplate, trace the
placed between the retainer and the head- shafts on the paper and cut-out shaft holes.
plate at point (S). This will be placed on the shafts before the
gears to protect the bearings from metal
C. Secure bearing retainer (12) with the correct shavings when drilling taper pin holes in the
amount of shim, to the headplate using following procedure.
capscrews (10). Torque capscrews to the
specifications given in FIGURE 24, page 24. D. Place feeler stock in the amount of 1/3 of the
total end clearance between drive headplate
D. Recheck end clearances. Approximately 1/3 and both impellers. This will stop the impel-
of the total end clearance should be on the lers from contacting the headplate while the
gear end and the remaining 2/3 on the drive gears are being driven on.
end (refer to FIGURE 21, page 20).
If clearances require adjusting, loosen the bearing

retainer capscrews (10) and insert shims to move
the impeller closer to the gear headplate and If installing gears on a blower
remove shims to move the impellers away from
the gear headplate. containing mechanical seals, a press
must be used to drive the gears on the
17. INSTALLING THE TIMING GEARS shafts. Blows from a hammer or
mallet will damage the seal.
Impellers are held in time by gears which are taper
pinned and bolted to a timing hub, which in turn is
pressed and taper pinned onto the shaft. The E. If reusing the timing gears and hubs, they
timing gears can be rotated in relation to the hub should be returned to their original position
by removing the taper pins in the web of the gear with respect to the impellers.
and loosening the capscrews. Because the cap-
screws are oversized, the gear will rotate -- within If replacement gears are used, secure each
limits -- relative to the timing hub when the screws gear (9) to its timing hub (39) with capscrews
are loosened. (38) and lockwasher (37) and tighten slightly.
SB--7--622 Page 22
Replacement gears have minimum If any of the four gear backlash read-
backlash marks on the outside diame- ings are not within the specified
ter of the gear face. These marks limits, the gears must be replaced.
should be located 180 degrees from
each other (see FIGURE 23).
K. Reream taper pin hole between the shaft and
hub with a hand reamer and replace taper pin
(8) if movement between the shaft and hub
F. Position impellers so they are 90 degrees to (39) was negligible. If rereaming fails to elim-
each other. Using the driving tool shown on inate edges due to slight misalignment, drill
page 12, install the gears and hubs on the and ream a new hole approximately 90
shafts using the taper pin holes and match degrees from the original hole. Control the
marks for correct positioning. Check to be depth of the taper pin, leaving approximately
sure impellers are in correct position as pre- 1/8” taper pin protruding beyond the hub and
viously match marked. shaft.
L. Reream center drilled hole in the hub and

gear web. If rereaming fails to eliminate
edges set up by retiming, ream hole for the
next larger taper pin or drill and ream a new
Utilize a press whenever possible hole approximately 90 degrees from the orig-
when installing gears. inal hole. Control the depth of the threaded
taper pin (36), leaving the threaded portion of
the pin protruded beyond the hub.
G. Refer to diagram in FIGURE 21, page 20.
Use feeler gauges to check clearances Replacement gears are not drilled for taper
between impeller lobes at positions A--A and pin (8). These holes must be drilled and
C--C. Add the clearances, and divide the total reamed after the gears are in proper position
clearance evenly between A--A and C--C. and the unit retimed.
H. Loosen the four capscrews (38) in one gear
only. Wedge the correct amount of feeler
gauge between the impeller at A--A. If move-
ment between the gear and hub is not suffi-
cient to time the impellers, it will be neces- Be careful not to allow cuttings to
sary to loosen the four capscrews (38) in the drop behind the gears and contami-
mating gear to obtain a large adjustment
range. Adjust so that the clearance at A--A
nate the bearings.
is equal to C--C within .001 inch.
Clearances must be checked on both sides M. Remove paper from behind the gears. Make
of each impeller lobe over the entire length. certain metal cuttings did not contaminate
This procedure may require repeating sever- the bearings.
al times until impeller lobe clearance is equal
on both sides. 18. Assemble gear cover (3) and gasket (7) to the
gear headplate (18) using capscrews (5). Tighten
I. Secure the timing gears (9) to the hubs (39) capscrews alternately and evenly. Refer to
with capscrews (38) and lockwasher (37). FIGURE 24, page 24 for torque specifications.
Tighten capscrews to the torque specifica-
tion listed in FIGURE 24, page 24. 19. Place blower on its feet on a flat surface. Loosen
capscrews (16) and level unit up. The bench or
J. Check gear backlash four places at 90 blower base flatness should be within .002 of an
degree intervals as described in the disas- inch. Re-tighten cap screws (16) to the specifica-
sembly procedure (Item 4). tions in FIGURE 24, page 24.
SB--7--622 Page 23
GEAR DIAMETER
Ref.
No. FASTENERS 6 7 8
5 Screw -- Gear Case to Headplate 16 30 30

10 Screw -- Bearing Retainer to Headplate 16 30 30
16 Screw -- Mounting Foot to Headplate 30 75 75
21 Screw -- Headplate to Impeller Case 30 75 75
30 Screw -- Drive Cover to Headplate 16 30 30
38 Screw -- Timing Hub to Gear 30 75 75
NOTE: REF. NO. DENOTES ITEMS IN EXPLODED VIEW DRAWINGS ON PAGES 25, 27 AND 29.
FIGURE 24 - TORQUE (FT-- LBS)
SB--7--622 Page 24
SECTION 8
PARTS LIST
300GAF810--B
(Ref. Drawing)
SB--7--622 Page 25
Order by Part Number and Description. Reference Numbers are for your convenience only.
MODEL GAF
Ref. No. Size - 6H Size - 6M Size - 6L
No. Description Req’d GAFH_P_ GAFM_P_ GAFL_P_
1 NAMEPLATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 301GAE496 301GAE496 301GAE496

2 PLUG FOR ALTERNATE OIL LEVEL CONN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 64AC4 64AC4 64AC4
3 GEAR CASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 900883064201 900883064201 900883064201
4 DRAIN PLUG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 64AC4 64AC4 64AC4
5 SCREW--GEAR CASE TO HEADPLATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 75LM113 75LM113 75LM113
6 BREATHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 5L223 5L223 5L223
Ø 7 GASKET GEAR CASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 200GAF715 200GAF715 200GAF715
Ø 8 TAPER PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 62V59 62V59 62V59
9 TIMING GEAR GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 200GAF6008 200GAF6008 200GAF6008
Ø 10 SCREW--BEARING RETAINER TO HEADPLATE . . . . . . . . . . 8 75A33N 75A33N 75A33N
12 BEARING RETAINER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 900883065501 900883065501 900883065501
Ø 13 SHIM SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 900881065400 900881065400 900881065400
Ø 14 BEARING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 900639080506 900639080506 900639080506
Ø 15 MAIN SEAL--PER APPLICATION BELOW
MECHANICAL SEAL VERSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 900871020006 900871020006 900871020006
LIP SEAL VERSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 60DD657 60DD657 60DD657
16 SCREW--FOOT TO HEADPLATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 655ED060 655ED060 655ED060
17 FOOT GROUP
VERTICAL FOOT GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 GAF81950 GAF81950 GAF81950
HORIZONTAL FOOT GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 GAF81951 GAF81951 GAF81951
18 HOUSING--BEARING (GEAR END) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LIP SEAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 900883064401 90088364401 900883064401
MECHANICAL SEAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 900883064501 90088364501 900883064501
19 DOWEL PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 62M48 62M48 62M48
20 LIFTING LUG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 200GAF451 200GAF451 200GAF451
21 SCREW--HEADPLATES TO IMPELLER CASE . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 655ED050 655ED050 655ED050
22 IMPELLER CASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 900883063901 900883064001 900883064101
23 SHAFT ASSEMBLY GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 GAF81952 GAF81954 GAF81953
SHAFT ASSEMBLY GROUP CONSISTS OF:
(1) ASSEMBLY SHAFT -- LONG
(1) ASSEMBLY SHAFT -- SHORT
24 HOUSING--BEARING (DRIVE END)
LIP SEAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 900883064901 900883064901 900883064901
MECHANICAL SEAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 900883064801 900883064801 900883064801
25 DRIVE KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 900639910406 900639910406 900639910406
26 GREASE FITTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 911659990606 911659990606 911659990606
27 GREASE FITTING CAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 40P41 40P41 40P41
28 WAVY SPRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 900669170506 900669170506 900669170506
29 DRIVE COVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 900883064601 900883064601 900883064601
30 SCREW--DRIVE COVER TO HEADPLATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 75LM113 75LM113 75LM113
Ø 31 DRIVE SEAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 60DD658 60DD658 60DD658
32 SPACER--GEAR END . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 900811060401 900811060401 900811060401
33 SPACER--GEAR & DRIVE END--SEAL/BRG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 900881066201 900881066201 900881066201
34 SPACER--DRIVE END DRIVE SHAFT--SEAL/BRG . . . . . . . . . 1 900881066401 900881066401 900881066401
Ø 35 BEARING--DRIVE END DRIVE SHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 900811060801 900811060801 900811060801
36 THREADED TAPER PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 62V67 62V67 62V67
37 WASHER--GEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 900649440205 900649440205 900649440205
38 SCREW--TIMING HUB TO GEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 655ED060 655ED060 655ED060
39 HUB--TIMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 900713060101 900713060101 900713060101
40 GAUGE--OIL LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 40P31 40P31 40P31
* 41 SPACER--DRIVE END DRIVE SHAFT--HD PLT--BRG . . . . . . 1 900881066301 900881066301 900881066301
REQUIRED WITH MECHANICAL SEAL UNITS
* 42 PLUGS REQUIRED WITH MECHANICAL SEAL UNITS . . . . 8 64AC2 64AC2 64AC2
44 SCREW--SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 76F92 76F92 76F92
Ø OVERHAUL KIT LIP SEAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 203GAF6010 203GAF6010 203GAF6010
Ø OVERHAUL KIT MECHANICAL SEAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 204GAF6010 204GAF6010 204GAF6010
* NOT SHOWN
Ø INCLUDED IN OVERHAUL KIT.
SB--7--622 Page 26
300GAG810--A
(Ref. Drawing)
SB--7--622 Page 27
MODEL GAG
No. Description Req’d GAGH_P_ GAGM_P_ GAGL_P_

2 PLUG FOR ALTERNATE OIL LEVEL CONN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 64B4 64B4 64B4
3 GEAR CASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 900893071701 900893071701 900893071701
5 SCREW--GEAR CASE TO HEADPLATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 75LM122 75LM122 75LM122
6 BREATHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 5L223 5L223 5L223
Ø 7 GASKET GEAR CASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 200GAG715 200GAG715 200GAG715
Ø 8 TAPER PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 62V60 62V60 62V60
9 TIMING GEAR GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 200GAG6008 200GAG6008 200GAG6008
Ø 10 SCREW--BEARING RETAINER TO HEADPLATE . . . . . . . . . . 8 655ED040N 655ED040N 655ED040N
Ø 13 SHIM SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 900891073800 900891073800 900891073800
Ø 14 BEARING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 DF138116 DF138116 DF138116
LIP SEAL VERSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 60DD715 60DD715 60DD715
16 SCREW--FOOT TO HEADPLATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 655EE070 655EE070 655EE070
17 FOOT GROUP
VERTICAL FOOT GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 GAG81958 GAG81958 GAG81958
HORIZONTAL FOOT GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 GAG81959 GAG81959 GAG81959
LIP SEAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 900893072801 900893072801 900893072801
MECHANICAL SEAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 200GAG006 200GAG006 200GAG006
19 DOWEL PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 62M48 62M48 62M48
21 SCREW--HEADPLATES TO IMPELLER CASE . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 655EE050 655EE050 655EE050
22 IMPELLER CASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 900893070101 900893070201 900893070301
23 SHAFT ASSEMBLY GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 GAG81960 GAG81962 GAG81961
LIP SEAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 900893070601 900893070601 900893070601
MECHANICAL SEAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 900893072601 900893072601 900893072601
25 DRIVE KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 900639910407 900639910407 900639910407
26 GREASE FITTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 911659990606 911659990606 911659990606
28 WAVY SPRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 900669170607 900669170607 900669170607
29 DRIVE COVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 900883073701 900883073701 900883073701
30 SCREW--DRIVE COVER TO HEADPLATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 75LM122 75LM122 75LM122
32 SPACER--GEAR END . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 900891073001 900891073001 900891073001
33 SPACER--GEAR & DRIVE END--SEAL/BRG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 200GAG144 200GAG144 200GAG144
34 SPACER--DRIVE END DRIVE SHAFT--SEAL/BRG . . . . . . . . . 1 201GAG144 201GAG144 201GAG144
37 WASHER--GEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 900649440507 900649440507 900649440507
38 SCREW--TIMING HUB TO GEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 655EE060 655EE060 655EE060
39 HUB--TIMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 900713060102 900713060102 900713060102
40 GAUGE--OIL LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 VP1004935 VP1004935 VP1004935
* 42 PLUGS REQ. W/MECH. SEAL UNITS(GEAR END) . . . . . . . . 4 64AC3 64AC3 64AC3
* 46 PLUGS REQ. W/MECH. SEAL UNITS (DRIVE END) . . . . . . . 4 64AC2 64AC2 64AC2
Ø OVERHAUL KIT LIP SEAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 200GAG6010 200GAG6010 200GAG6010

Ø OVERHAUL KIT MECHANICAL SEAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 201GAG6010 201GAG6010 201GAG6010
* NOT SHOWN
SB--7--622 Page 28
300GAH810--A
(Ref. Drawing)
SB--7--622 Page 29
MODEL GAH
No. Description Req’d GAHH_P_ GAHM_P_ GAHL_P_

2 PLUG FOR ALTERNATE OIL LEVEL CONN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 64AC5 64AC5 64AC5
3 GEAR CASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 900893082501 900893082501 900893082501
5 SCREW--GEAR CASE TO HEADPLATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 2009649 2009649 2009649
6 BREATHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 5L223 5L223 5L223
Ø 7 GASKET GEAR CASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 200GAH715 200GAH715 200GAH715
Ø 8 TAPER PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 62V61 62V61 62V61
9 TIMING GEAR GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 200GAH6008 200GAH6008 200GAH6008
10 SCREW--BEARING RETAINER TO HEADPLATE . . . . . . . . . . 8 655ED04N 655ED04N 655ED04N
11 LOCKWASHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 95B3 95B3 95B3
Ø 13 SHIM SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 910639630008 910639630008 910639630008
Ø 14 BEARING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 900639080808 900639080808 900639080808
LIP SEAL VERSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 910751061902 910751061902 910751061902
16 SCREW--FOOT TO HEADPLATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 655EE080 655EE080 655EE080
17 FOOT GROUP
VERTICAL FOOT GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 GAH81966 GAH81966 GAH81966
HORIZONTAL FOOT GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 GAH81967 GAH81967 GAH81967
LIP SEAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 900894082301 900894082301 900894082301
MECHANICAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 200GAH006 200GAH006 200GAH006
19 DOWEL PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 62M48 62M48 62M48
21 SCREW--HEADPLATES TO IMPELLER CASE . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 655EE060 655EE060 655EE060
22 IMPELLER CASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 900653021708 910613746808 910613747008
23 SHAFT ASSEMBLY GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 GAH81968 GAH81970 GAH81969
LIP SEAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 900894082101 900894082101 900894082101
MECHANICAL SEAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 201GAH006 201GAH006 201GAH006
25 DRIVE KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 900639910407 900639910407 900639910407
26 GREASE FITTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 911659990606 911659990606 911659990606
28 WAVY SPRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 900669170708 900669170708 900669170708
29 DRIVE COVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 900693086301 900693086301 900693086301
30 SCREW--DRIVE COVER TO HEADPLATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 655ED030 655ED030 655ED030
32 SPACER--GEAR END . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 900811060403 900811060403 900811060403
33 SPACER--GEAR & DRIVE END -- SEAL/BRG . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 900871060803 900871060803 900871060803
34 SPACER--DRIVE END DRIVE SHAFT--SEAL/BRG . . . . . . . . . 1 202GAH144 202GAH144 202GAH144
37 WASHER--GEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 900649440507 900649440507 900649440507
38 SCREW--TIMING HUB TO GEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 655EE080 655EE080 655EE080
39 HUB--TIMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 900713060103 900713060103 900713060103
40 GAUGE--OIL LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 40P45 40P45 40P45
* 42 PLUGS REQUIRED WITH MECHANICAL SEAL UNITS . . . . 8 64AC3 64AC3 64AC3
43 DRIVEN COVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 900693086401 900693086401 900693086401
Ø OVERHAUL KIT LIP SEAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 GAH81972 GAH81972 GAH81972

Ø OVERHAUL KIT MECHANICAL SEAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 GAH81971 GAH81971 GAH81971
* NOT SHOWN
SB--7--622 Page 30
WARRANTY
SUTORBILT BLOWERS
SUTORBILT LEGEND SERIES
GENERAL PROVISIONS AND LIMITATIONS Company’s judgment is proved not to be as warranted.

Labor shall be limited to the amount specified in the
Gardner Denver (the “Company”) warrants to each orig-
Company’s labor rate schedule.
inal retail purchaser (“Purchaser”) of its new products
from the Company or its authorized distributor that such Labor costs in excess of the Company rate schedule
products are, at the time of delivery to the Purchaser, amounts or labor provided by unauthorized service
made with good material and workmanship. No warran- personnel is not provided for by this warranty.
ty is made with respect to:
Transportation of Company’s choice, within the conti-
1. Any product which has been repaired or altered nental United States, is covered by this warranty for
in such a way, in the Company’s judgment, as replacement of any blower which in the Company’s
to affect the product adversely. judgement proved not to be as warranted. For user
locations outside the continental United States, the
2. Any product which has, in the Company’s judg-
Company will provide transportation, by the carrier of its
ment been subject to negligence, accident,
choice to and from the nearest Authorized Distributor
improper storage, or improper installation or and the Company’s designated facility. The Company
application. may require the return of any blower claimed not to be
3. Any product which has not been operated or as warranted to one of its facilities as designated by the
maintained in accordance with normal practice Company, transportation prepaid by Purchaser, to
and with the recommendations of the Company. establish a claim under this warranty.
4. Components or accessories manufactured, Replacement parts provided under the terms of the
warranted and serviced by others. warranty are warranted for the remainder of the Warranty
Period of the product upon which installed to the same
5. Any reconditioned or prior owned product. extent as if such parts were original components thereof.
Claims for items described in (4) above should be DISCLAIMER
submitted directly to the manufacturer.
THE FOREGOING WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND
WARRANTY PERIOD IT IS EXPRESSLY AGREED THAT, EXCEPT AS TO
The Company’s obligation under this warranty is limited TITLE, THE COMPANY MAKES NO OTHER WAR-
to repairing or, at its option, replacing, during normal RANTIES, EXPRESSED, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY,
business hours at an authorized service facility of the INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF
Company, any part which in its judgment proved not to MERCHANTABILITY.
be as warranted within the applicable Warranty Period THE REMEDY PROVIDED UNDER THIS WARRAN-
as follows. TY SHALL BE THE SOLE, EXCLUSIVE AND ONLY
BARE BLOWERS REMEDY AVAILABLE TO PURCHASER AND IN NO
CASE SHALL THE COMPANY BE SUBJECT TO ANY
Basic bare blowers, consisting of all parts within, are OTHER OBLIGATIONS OR LIABILITIES. UNDER NO
warranted for 18 months from date of initial use or 24 CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL THE COMPANY BE
months from date of shipment to the first purchaser, LIABLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR
whichever occurs first. CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, EXPENSES,
Any disassembly or partial disassembly of the blower, LOSSES OR DELAYS HOWSOEVER CAUSED.
or failure to return the “unopened” blower per Company No statement, representation, agreement, or under-
instructions, will be cause for denial of warranty. standing, oral or written, made by any agent, distributor,
OTHER COMPONENTS representative, or employee of the Company which is
not contained in this Warranty will be binding upon the
All other components are warranted for 12 months from
Company unless made in writing and executed by an
date of initial use or 18 months from date of shipment
officer of the Company.
to first purchaser, whichever comes first.
This warranty shall not be effective as to any claim
The Company reserves the right to withdraw the Uncon-
which is not presented within 30 days after the date
tested Warranty where evidence indicates application
upon which the product is claimed not to have been as
outside the stated performance area, or where there is
warranted. Any action for breach of this warranty must
evidence of abuse
be commenced within one year after the date upon
LABOR TRANSPORTATION AND INSPECTION which the cause of action occurred.
The Company will provide labor, by Company represen- Any adjustment made pursuant to this warranty shall
tative or authorized service personnel, for repair or not be construed as an admission by the Company that
replacement of any product or part thereof which in the any product was not as warranted.
COPYRIGHT 2005 Gardner Denver, Inc.

Trerice: 600C Series Page 1 of 3
De-Mar & Associates, Inc

Parker & Foster Division
Contact Information
600C Stock in Special Application Ranges & Pressure Gauge

Series: KC Options Accessories
http://de-mar.com/trerice/gauges/600c.html 5/18/2009
De-Mar & Associates, Inc Kansas City Phone: 913-381-6810 Kansas City Fax: 913-381-9332
Parker & Foster Division Wichita Phone: 316-794-2686 Email: pfinc@birch.net
Start-up5
Adjusting pick-up probes5.3
5.3 Adjusting pick-up probes
5.3.1 Horizontal pick-up probe

1. Completely open the air flow adjustment sleeve (2).
While material is being conveyed to the farthest receiver, slowly close
the sleeve until a steady flow of material is achieved. The blower
gauge reading should be between 33.86 kPa [10 in Hg] vacuum and
40.64 kPa [12 in Hg] vacuum. The blower reading should never ex-
ceed 40.64 kPa [12 in Hg] vacuum.
(1) Slotted Holes (open) 1

(rotate)
2
Fig. 5.1 Horizontal pick-up probe
5.3.2 Vertical pick-up probe

1. Completely open the air flow adjustment sleeve(1) if you are using
a pellet probe.
2. With the probe’s inlet in the material and the system conveying to
the farthest receiver, gradually close sleeve (1) until a steady flow
of material is achieved. The blower gauge reading should be
between 33.86 kPa [10 in Hg] vacuum and 40.64 kPa [12 in Hg]
vacuum. The blower reading should never exceed 40.64 kPa [12
in Hg] vacuum.
3. If you are using a powder probe, note that some powder materials
may require partial closing of the bottom sleeve (2) to achieve an
even flow of material.
• A = Pellet probe 3
• B = Powder probe
(1) Air Flow Adjustment Sleeve 1
(rotate) 2
(rotate)
(3) Slotted Holes (open)
A B
Fig. 5.2 Vertical Pick-up Probe

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
5/3/2010
This schedule is provided for basic maintenance of equipment components. For complete maintenance
instructions for each piece of equipment within your system, refer to the individual Owner's Manuals.
Category Items Inspection Action Required

Pressure Blower Inlet Filter 6 months Clean with compressed air,
or replace if worn
Vacuum System Inlet Filter 6 months Clean or Replace if worn
Inline Filter Cartridge 3-4 months Clean or Replace if worn
Filter Receiver Cartridges Differential Pressure Gauge Clean or Replace if worn
Reading Above 5" WG
Filters / Bin Vent Cartridges Differential Pressure Gauge Clean or Replace if worn
Cartridges Reading Above 5" WG
Modular Bin Vent Cartridges 6 months Clean or Replace if worn
SLS Receiver Cartridges 6 months Clean or Replace if worn
Sack Dump Cartridges 6 months Clean or Replace if worn
All cartridges should be
replaced if encrusted with
hardened material
Gear Reducer Lubrication Check at regular intervals Change oil in the gear
(every 2 months) and main- reducer after the first week
tain proper oil level of service, & twice yearly
thereafter.
Drive Roller Chain Check alignment & tension Adjust & Lubricate (see
Aerolock w/ (every 2 months) Owner's Manual)
Drive and Aerolock Bearing Lubrication Check after every 750 hours Grease after 750 hours
Bin Discharger of service, or once a month of service
w/ Drive for heavy applications
Motor Bearing Lubrication Most are lubricated for life. Be sure to check & verify.
If not, follow manufacturer's Grease lubricate.
recommendation.
Blower Pump Lubrication Check at regular intervals Change oil after 6000 hrs.
(every 2 months) and main- or 1500 hrs. if using a
tain proper oil level mineral based lubricant
Motor Bearing Lubrication Check every 1-2 years. Grease lubricate the
Reduce by 50% if hostile bearings.
environment or outside.
Drive Belts Check after first 2-4 hours Adjust alignment & tension.
Blower Packages of service and then once a Replace worn or damaged
year thereafter. belts.
Sutorbilt Pump Drive Check after 500 hours of Grease lubrication
Bearings operation
Maintenance Schedule continued
Category Items Inspection Action Required
Compressed Air Filter-Regulator-Gauge Kit Every 30 days Drain moisture from filter
bowl
Vacuum Receivers Check every 3 months Blow from inside to outside

Replace if encrusted or
worn.
Machine Loaders Check every 3 months Blow from inside to outside
worn.
Filter Receiver Check every 3 months Blow from inside to outside
Filter Bags Replace if encrusted or
worn.
Bin Vent Filter Check every 3 months Blow from inside to outside
worn.
Mini Filter Check every 3 months Blow from inside to outside
worn.
Vibrator Check after every 2000 Grease & lubricate.

hours of operation (See Owner's Manual)
Hanging Arms Check periodically for Replace if necessary
Bin Activators wear or damage
Flexible Rubber Sleeve Check once a year for Replace if necessary
weathering or damage
Flex Sock Check once a year for Replace if necessary
wear or damage
Gearbox Check oil level peroiodically. Change oil every 10,000 hrs
Maintain proper oil level. of service.
Motor Smaller motor frame sizes Check and grease lube
are prelubed for life. Larger every 2-3 months.
Bulk Bag Unloaders frames sizes will have
grease fittings.
Hoist & Chain Check chain every 3 mo. Lubricate if needed.
Follow all maintenance
within Owner's Manual.
Flow Drawing Documents Search Print Queue
CUSTOMER START GUIDE

Navigating K-Tron / Premier’s CD Electronic Owner’s Manual
Opening Up the CD Manual
Insert the CD into a DVD/CD ROM Drive. If the CD does not open, then “AutoRun” has been
disabled on your computer for security reasons.
When the CD does not open up, then you will need to manually open it up. You can open up the
CD in Microsoft Windows Explorer or you can click on MY COMPUTER for Windows XP users, or
COMPUTER for Windows Vista and Windows 7 users. Click on the drive letter of the DVD/CD
ROM that you inserted the CD into. (NOTE – This drive letter will have a small orange PPI logo
next to it.) Once you have located the drive letter and clicked it open, locate a file called
RUN.exe within this folder and click this file open.
What Type of Owner’s Manual do you have?

Your Owner’s Manual will be either a Component Order Manual, or a System Order Manual.
A Component Order Manual will open up directly to the DOCUMENTS TAB. There will be no
FLOW DRAWING TAB. A System Order Manual will open up directly to the FLOW DRAWING
TAB. Please note the TABS in the upper left menu bar. These TABS are Documents, Search,
and Print Queue for Component Order Manuals. For System Order Manuals, these TABS are
Flow Drawing, Documents, Search, and Print Queue.
Instructions for each TAB will be discussed individually following.
FLOW DRAWING TAB

A Flow Drawing Schematic with red tags will appear on your monitor screen when a System
Order Manual is first opened. These red tags are (System / Item No’s.) assigned to each piece of
equipment that makes up your Pneumatic System. If the Flow Drawing is too small and
unreadable, then click on the white blank space within the Flow Drawing, and it will ZOOM UP.
Repeat this until a readable size is desired. If the Flow Drawing reaches a large size and goes
outside the boundaries of your Monitor Display, vertical and horizontal blue scroll bars will appear
to the far right and lower bottom. These are for the convience of scrolling up, down, left, or right
within the Flow Drawing. If you want the Flow Drawing back to its original size, then click on the
blue ZOOM ALL in the upper right corner of your screen.
The red tags on the Flow Drawing Schematic are based on a (System No. – Item No.) type
format. If your order was for one system, then an example of a red tag no. will be 01-001. (The
system no. is 01 and the item no. is 001.) Each piece of equipment will be numbered in sequence
for System 1. If two systems are ordered, the (System No. – Item No.) format for System 2 will
change to 02-001 and all equipment in numbered sequence.
1
There are occasions when there could be more than one Flow Drawing displayed on your
screen. All of the above will apply to this also.
If you are looking for or interested in a certain piece of equipment within the Flow Drawing, then
locate the red tag for it, and click it open. You are automatically navigated to the DOCUMENTS
TAB. Please NOTE the red tag (System No. – Item No.) that you clicked open. This
information will help you when you are navigating the DOCUMENTS TAB, which will be discussed
following.
Don’t forget about the FLOW DRAWING TAB! This is the main map layout for the Electronic
Owner’s Manual. If you get lost within the manual, you can always click on the Flow Drawing
Tab to go back to the starting line.
DOCUMENTS TAB
This is the information highway tab. It is within this tab that you will find all information about
each piece of equipment on your order. When you clicked open a red tag under the Flow
Drawing Tab, did you take note of the (System No. – Item No.)? You will note that when the
Document Tab automatically opens that this same (System No. – Item No.) is highlighted in blue in
the left narrow white pane. When this tab is open, there is a narrow white left pane, and a large
gray right pane. The file format works in the same manner as Microsoft Windows Explorer.
There are root directory files (System No. – Item No.) and under those are subdirectory files (Part
No’s.) All files are in a “tree” or “hive” type structure. You can plus(+) or minus(-) any directory.
Please note the blue highlighted (System No. – Item No.) in the left white pane. Please note
that under this, all the corresponding part numbers pertaining to this (System No. – Item No.) have
exploded out into a tree or hive. Also, in the right large gray pane, you will see this same (System
No. – Item No.) at the top and all part numbers following with all the attached PDF information files.
Please note the printer icon next to each PDF file. This will be discussed in the PRINT QUEUE
TAB. All the part numbers exploded out in the right gray pane pertain to the same (System No. –
Item No.) highlighted in blue in the left white pane, which in turn refers back to the red tag that was
originally clicked under the Flow Drawing Tab.
For each item you are interested in or need information on, navigate back to the Flow Drawing
Tab and click on the red tag for the piece of equipment of interest.
If the left white pane gets busy and confusing, click on the minus (-) on the part numbers and
minimize some of them. Remember, the tree or hive explodes and minimizes just like Microsoft
Windows Explorer.
Other information to cover under the DOCUMENTS TAB is the information that appears
under the subdirectory “DOCUMENTS” at the top of this directory. The information contained in
this subdirectory is specific information for your System or Component Order.
Information here includes the Aerolock Trouble Shooting Guide, the Complete Manual in PDF
format, all Electrical Drawings, a PDF file of the Flow Drawing, the Index File, all Installation
Drawings, Installation Guidelines, the Installation Manual (same as Complete Manual), a
Maintenance Schedule, and an Operational Sequence. All of this information can be viewed
separately and can be added to the print queue for printing to paper.
2
SEARCH TAB
If you cannot locate a specific piece of equipment or a part number within the CD Manual, then
you can do a quick search under the SEARCH TAB. Keywords such as Aerolock, Blower,
Control, Coupling, Elbow, Filter, Panel, Receiver, or Valve can be typed in the search bar. Once
you have entered the keyword or part number then click on “Search.” Part numbers pertaining
to the search results will display. Click open any part number, and all the information will appear
in the right gray pane. If you know specific part numbers, they can also be typed into the
search bar.
Please note – All keywords and part numbers can be obtained from the INDEX FILE. The
Index File is located under the DOCUMENTS TAB and in a sub-directory called DOCUMENTS.
PRINT QUEUE TAB

Under this tab, you can add items to the Print Queue for printing to paper. You can add any part
number to the Print Queue by simply clicking the small “printer icon” located next to each PDF file
throughout the manual from the DOCUMENTS TAB. Please note, that once you click the printer
icon for that item, the (green + on the icon) changes to a (red – on the icon.) When you click on
any item to add it to the print queue, you can verify that it has been added simply by opening up
the Print Queue Tab. The item will be added to the list in the order you clicked them to the print
queue.
Once you have the documents that you want to print loaded into the print queue, click on “Print
Documents” within the Print Queue Tab. These items should start printing to your default printer
designated on your computer. Please note that when these items are finished printing, you will
need to click on “Clear Print Queue” to remove them from the list.
Otherwise, you will end up printing them up twice, as you add new items to the print queue.
How many documents you add to the print queue depends on your printer. If you have a small
desktop printer, its best to only add 3-5 documents at a time. Overloading it will cause your
printer to lock up and not print. If you have a large copier / printer available through a network,
then you can send the complete manual or a large volume of documents to it at once. The
Complete Manual can be found under the Document Tab and in a subdirectory called
“Documents.” Because of the size of the Complete Manual, it sometimes is best to print it out
during non-business hours. The Complete Manual can take several hours to print out.
Premier Pneumatics, Inc.
A Member of the K-Tron Process Group
3
The CD Electronic Owner’s Manual may be copied to any PC
Hard Drive or to a Network Server for access by anyone
with permission to your server.
Follow the steps below.
1. Create a folder on your Local Hard Drive or your Network Server and name it
“CD ELECTRONIC MANUAL,” or something similar. This can be done in
Microsoft Windows Explorer. Once Explorer is open, highlight your Local Hard
Drive Letter or your Network Server.
WINDOWS XP - Across the top of Windows Explorer, in the menu bar, click
on “FILE” and then “NEW” in its popup submenu. Type in the folder name
(CD Electronic Manual) when prompted with the cursor. Over write the word
“New Folder.”
WINDOWS VISTA & WINDOWS 7 – Click on location where you would

like to have the CD Electronic Manual copied to. Highlight it with the cursor
and then click the right button on the mouse. Click new in the popup submenu
Give the folder a Name and remember it’s location.
2. Insert the original CD Electronic Owner’s Manual into a CD / DVD Rom Drive.
3. Open up Microsoft Windows Explorer and find the Drive Letter of the ROM
Drive that you inserted the CD Manual into. Click this open, and the contents of
the CD will be revealed. Highligh all the files and copy them into the file folder
that you created above on your Local Hard Drive or Network Server.
4. Remove the CD from your ROM Drive.
5. Find the folder on your Local Hard Drive or Network Server that you copied the
contents of the CD into. Within this folder, click on the “RUN. EXE” file, and
your CD Electronic Owner’s Manual will open up directly from your Hard Drive
or your Network Server.
6. This will also serve as a backup for the Owner’s Manual should the CD’s ever get
lost or damaged.

Salina, KS USA 67402-0017
Phone (785-825-1611)
Fax (785-825-8759)
www.ktron.com

Manual Premier Linea 6

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Manual Premier Linea 6

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Job No.

162265 OWNERS MANUAL INDEX

Line No. System-Item Part No. & S-No. Description Quantity

100 01-001 5314-58 PROBE BOX,AL SGL POS 4"MAX 4

Phone: 785-825-1611 Premier Pneumatics, Inc.

RECEIVERS FOR “KEEP FULL” OPERATION

RECEIVERS FOR “FEEDER REFILL” OPERATION

GENERAL PROGRAMMING FEATURES

INSTALLATION GUIDELINES FOR CONVEYING AND AIR ONLY LINES

COMMON PROBLEMS FOUND DURING START-UP

1. Blower pumps or gear cases not filled or Protector flanges).

COMPONENT INSTALLATION CHECKLIST

Blower Package breaker valve on vacuum blower packages

606 North Front Street / P.O. Box 17

COMPONENT INSTALLATION CHECKLIST

Aerolock Rotary Valve Aeropass Fill Valve

606 North Front Street / P.O. Box 17

COMPONENT INSTALLATION CHECKLIST

606 North Front Street / P.O. Box 17

COMPONENT INSTALLATION CHECKLIST

7. Ensure the load cells have been properly

Knife Gate / Valve

606 North Front Street / P.O. Box 17

SERIES4 2400 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION CHECKLIST

Series 2400 Blower Package receiver’s panel/control module. 10 ft. drop

606 North Front Street / P.O. Box 17

SERIES4 2400 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION CHECKLIST

606 North Front Street / P.O. Box 17

Read this manual prior to operating or

0990034606-EN Rev. 1.0.0

Premier Pneumatics, Inc. Tel. 001 (0) 785 / 825 1611

K-TRON (U.S.) Tel. 001 (0) 856 / 589 0500

K-TRON (Switzerland) Tel. 0041 (0) 62 / 885 7171

Before you call...

Using the manual:

Specifies where information or a situation must be checked.

1 Safety notes ............................................................. 5

3 Technical data ....................................................... 14

Docu-No.: 0990034606-EN Rev. 1.0.0 Page 3

7 Filter cleaning ........................................................ 23

Page 4 Docu-No.: 0990034606-EN Rev. 1.0.0

Installation, commissioning and programming of the specified

1.1 Safety symbols definitions

V The safety alert symbol is used to alert to the potential personal

V CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not

V CAUTION with safety alert indicates a potentially hazardous

V WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not

V DANGER indicates a extremely hazardous situation which, if not

Docu-No.: 0990034606-EN Rev. 1.0.0 Page 5

1.1.1 Electrical hazard icon

This sign indicates an electrical hazard. It is located on covers and

1.1.2 Ground icon

This sign indicates that a ground/PE connection is required.

1.1.3 No hands icon

1.1.4 Power icon

Disconnect power and lock out/tag out equipment before performing

1.1.5 Ear protection icon

1.1.6 No access for unauthorized persons

No access is allowed for persons unauthorized to work on equipment.

Page 6 Docu-No.: 0990034606-EN Rev. 1.0.0

1.2 Responsibilities of the owner

1.3 Proper use

V Only operate a conveying device in conjunction with a suitable

1.4 Organizational measures